JP7430938B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine that has an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time-saving state), certain results frequently result in small wins, thereby providing a predetermined profit to the player. A gaming machine equipped with an advantageous gaming state has appeared (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-76136 Publication

However, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions are desired to be more entertaining.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine equipped with a function of a gaming state that is highly interesting and advantageous to players.

The present invention provides the following gaming machine.
a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
identification information display means capable of executing a first specific game that notifies the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the identification information;
gaming state control means for switching the gaming state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a predetermined passing area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member capable of being displaced between a first state and a second state;
displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the predetermined passage area;
a specific passage area disposed in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium fired in the first aspect can pass;
The selection area is capable of causing the gaming medium that has passed through the specific passing area to pass through any one of a plurality of areas through which gaming media can pass, including the first starting area and the predetermined passing area,
The second starting region does not pass the game medium fired in the first mode, but allows the game medium fired in a second mode different from the first mode to pass,
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state that can be controlled so that profits are more likely to be awarded to the player over a predetermined period of time, and a first gaming state that is controllable so that profits are more likely to be awarded to the player over a longer period of time than the predetermined time. a controllable second gaming state;
The special gaming state transition determination means is configured to determine that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area, rather than determining that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area. 1 The probability of determining that the game will move to the gaming state is high;
The second state is a state in which it is difficult for the gaming medium to pass through the second starting region, and the first state is a state in which it is difficult for the gaming medium to pass through the second starting region than in the second state. easy condition,
The second starting region is capable of allowing game media to pass through when the displacement member is displaced to the first state,
The displacement member is operable in a predetermined displacement pattern when the displacement determining means determines to displace the displacement member to the first state,
The first specific game can be executed when a second specific game is being executed that notifies the determination result of the displacement determining means by changing and stopping the identification information,
During the period in which the operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state, and the operation of displacing from the second state to the first state may be performed multiple times. The game medium can be executed once, and when the operation is performed once, the game medium can pass through the second start area, and when the first game medium passes through the second start area, the game medium can be executed once. The first specific game can be executed a plurality of times, and when the operation is performed a plurality of times, the first specific game triggered by passage of the game medium to the second starting area can be executed at most the second starting area. It can be executed a number of times according to the number of passed gaming media ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a gaming state function that is highly interesting and advantageous for players.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. These are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables in the first pachinko gaming machine, including (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a front view showing an example of the appearance of a game board unit 3010 included in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a front view schematically showing the main part of the internal configuration of the starting winning accessory unit 3150. It is an explanatory view showing the operation of sorting game balls by the sorting device 3506. It is a front view showing the operation of sorting game balls by the sorting device 3506. It is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 when the distribution device 3506 distributes the game balls to the first operating mechanism 3511 side. It is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 when the distribution device 3506 distributes the game balls to the second operating mechanism 3512 side. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 in the case of winning the normal symbol lottery. It shows the state transition of the normal electric accessory 3146, the sorting device 3506, the second non-electric accessory activation switch 3515, the second non-electric accessory 3441, and the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 when a general figure is won in the normal state. This is a time chart. It is a flowchart (Part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the distribution device control process in the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start process of the normal symbol in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of opening pattern setting processing in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the gaming state in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state at the time of small hit RUSH in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state at the end of the small hit RUSH in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance screen in a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance screen in a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance screen in a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance screen in a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a process when receiving a special symbol game end command in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing transition of the game state of modification 1 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the game state of modification 2 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the gaming state of modification 3 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a game board unit of modification 4 of modification 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the game state of modification 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process in modification 5 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in modification 5 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in modification 5 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance screen in modification 5 of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of a game using the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the gaming state of modification 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing typically the composition of the game board unit concerning modification 2 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance performed in a special figure variation when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) or a special figure variation that becomes a jackpot in the second round of the sixth pachinko game machine in modification example 2. . It is an explanatory view showing typically the composition of the game board unit concerning modification 3 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing the composition and operation of a rotating accessory 185 according to Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance screen displayed on display device 7 in modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the gaming state in modification 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the game state in modification 6 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing transition of the gaming state in modification 7 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display a first special symbol and a second special symbol in parallel. Further, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process, which will be described later, are displayed. (hereinafter also referred to as "regular symbol lottery") results are finalized. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. You can. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light or producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a staff member at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, a game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115 arranged in the section, the first starting opening 120, the general winning opening 122, the passage gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting opening 140A, 140B, and the ordinary electric winning opening It includes an object unit 145, a small winning unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left and right direction below and in front of the display area of the display device 7. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are used in the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called "holding", and the starting information of the first special symbol being held is also called "the reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the gaming area 105, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). . When a game ball enters the general winning hole 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

Further, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension, and the starting information of the suspended normal symbol is also referred to as "the reserved ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a jackpot jackpot 131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot 131. , and a special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located approximately in the lower right part of the game area 105 and is located below the passage gate unit 125.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or the center accessory 115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, for example, ten prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. Note that the state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot opening 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 140A and a second starting port 140B are arranged in the gaming area 105, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 140A and 140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 141A, 141B (see FIG. 6 described later) detect winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 140A, 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131, there are two vertically flowing paths 107a and 107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 131 is sent to the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a land in the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not entered the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessories unit 145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the downward flow path 107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electricity shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal electricity solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) that operates the normal electricity shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, for example, a pair of blade members, called a so-called electric tulip, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 150 includes a small winning large winning opening 151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 152 that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 154 that can operate this small hit shutter 153.

By moving forward and backward in the front and back direction, the small winning shutter 153 can be brought into an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151, and a game ball can be easily entered into the small winning large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 145 in the lower flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning large prize opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 151, the player enters the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side, making it difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening 131 for the jackpot and the large winning opening 151 for the small winning are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is any one of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140A, 140B, the jackpot jackpot 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 58 such as movable accessories that are controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The presentation accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is opened and closed. This makes it easier for game balls to win (pass).

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 is for displaying the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when the variable display of normal symbols is pending. In addition, it is provided with normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a consisting of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, 8 LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 is It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol starting conditions") are met, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) that constitutes the second special symbol display section 164 is determined to be a jackpot. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol reservation display section is for displaying the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reserved special symbols") when variable displays of special symbols are reserved. A first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with. "The variable display of the first special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination for the first special symbol, and random values for effect selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when a value (such as a numerical value, etc.) is extracted until the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with. "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the winning (passage) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B is detected and various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second A random number value for jackpot determination of the special symbol, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for reach determination of the second special symbol, a random value for performance selection used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, etc. This refers to the state from when various random numbers, etc.) are extracted until the starting conditions for the second special symbol are satisfied. Note that the starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a general electric solenoid 148, a special electric solenoid 135, a small hit solenoid 154, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big winning port count switch 132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which movement patterns are stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be explained. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow of the first pachinko game machine. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls in the starting holes 120, 140A, and 140B, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. . In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state or small win game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state or small win game state is considered to be one special symbol game. do.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is kept open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30,000 msec maximum) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is performed when there is a winning (passage) to the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B, and This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of special symbol starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state or a high probability non-time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as voices and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the type of jackpot is such that both the variable probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state shifts to the variable probability-variable time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small win, a small win game control process is performed.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of a game ball to the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, special symbol starting information extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol design, random number for reach determination, and effect selection) (various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are held until the special symbol starting conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, when a game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol starts winning and the time when the special symbol's starting conditions are met, Based on the extracted starting information, a look-ahead judgment is performed to determine the winning/losing (“jackpot” winning or not) and fluctuation pattern prior to the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead judgment is performed to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. It may also be provided with a performance function. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140A, 140B is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs a variable display control process that controls variable display of the normal symbols, and an effect that performs a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and a game is sent to the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where it is possible or easy for the ball to enter the prize (pass). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the second starting port 140B). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, etc.) is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range ( A soft random number method may be used that generates a random number within a certain range (range), or a hard random number method may be used that extracts a random number from a counter in a random number generator in which the random number is updated at a predetermined period.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a time saving control in which probability variable control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability changing control is not executed but the time saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed with the game. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is recommended in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended way of hitting, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values, such as settings 1 to 6, can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in the gaming state where the probability change flag is on (in this example, the high probability time-saving gaming state and the high probability non-time saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, and about 1/77 at setting 2. setting is approximately 1/76, setting 3 is approximately 1/75, setting 4 is approximately 1/74, setting 5 is approximately 1/73, and setting 6 is approximately 1/72. Although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the setting value, or may be a common probability for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 9 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 9 is shown as an example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a jackpot determination table that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140A, 140B. This table is referred to when determining a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are only "jackpot" and "loss". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data for each value (0 or 1) of the probability change flag. , the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined as a "loss" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, if the variable probability flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 204, it is determined as a "jackpot" and the winning/losing determination is made. The value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 204, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

Also, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 850, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is " Jackpot judgment value data” is determined. Also, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 850, it will be determined as a "lose", and the determination value data will be set as "lose". "Judgement value data" is determined.

Similarly, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 204, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is It is determined as "Jackpot Judgment Value Data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 205 to 22049, it will be determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data will be It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 22049, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 850, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is " Jackpot judgment value data” is determined. In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 851 to 22695, it will be determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data will be It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 22695, it will be determined as a "loss", and the determination value data will be "lost". "Judgement value data" is determined.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" that determine the. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Also, if small hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process, "z7" is used as the hit selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol from 0 to 99. is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is operated to allow the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is "lose", the hit selection symbol command will not be selected, and the symbol designation command will not be selected, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol from 0 to 99. The command "zA7" is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 9), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 9) is determined. 10), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a winning selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed in which the winning of the special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the symbol designation command are determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol. good.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the number of probability variations, and the value of the time saving flag, according to the winning selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. , and the number of time reductions, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is on, the number of probability changes is "10000", and the time saving flag is set to off. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Furthermore, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability change flag is off, the time saving flag is on, and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is on, the number of probability changes is "10000", and the time saving flag is set to off. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time saving flag is on, and the time saving number is determined to be "10000". Furthermore, when the winning selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability change flag is off, the time saving flag is on, and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 11 are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. Note that when the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the number of probability variations is not determined, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" to mean that probability variation control is not executed.

In addition, the probability variation number of "10000" means that probability variation control is continuously executed until it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (i.e., the next jackpot). The idea is that it can be done.

[1-4-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine, including (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start. It is. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 12 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140A, 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol.

In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 12(A), for example.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is recommended, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the variation of special symbols for a high start shown in FIG. 12(B) A special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12(A) and (B), the variation pattern of the special symbol includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. Determined based on random values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, compared to the case where the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start. , the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be made different by, for example, changing the range of the random number value for performance selection for each set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, and for example, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or low start. In the definite time saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for activation. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination will be NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-5-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power cutoff process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the power cutoff process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more. If the value is "0" for all of the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be explained later in the sub control process.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

If it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S72), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S73. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S72.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

If it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S75), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S76. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S75 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S75), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

If it is determined in S78 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S78), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

If it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 13 to 13). (see Figure 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S81), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[1-5-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S76 or S79 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S93 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S93 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S94 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S96 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S98 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After completing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 if the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 if it is called in S76, and calls it in S79. If it has been called, the process returns to S80, and if it has been called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S102 is determined as NO). ), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S102), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S102), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In addition, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process in S104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104) (for example, jackpot, small hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol if the special symbol hit determination process is a loss. After executing the process in S105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of jackpots, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S106, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random number value for reach determination and/or the random number value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starts (see FIG. 12(A)), and the right-handed In gaming states where hitting is recommended (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see Fig. 12 (B)) is With reference to this, a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 20) is performed. (see S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S111) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S112)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIGS. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO in S123), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) ) will be carried out. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit.

In S127, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (NO determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit (YES determination in S127), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot.

In S129, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S129), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot (YES determination in S129), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (if NO in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S131), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process in S137, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Ru. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S141), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S142, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S143. On the other hand, if it is determined in S142 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S142), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S143), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S145, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S146. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) to be opened (S147), and the external terminal board 184 jackpot signal setting process (S148), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting process (S150), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S151) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 20) is performed. (see S96) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S161). In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S163). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process, ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

If it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S171), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 131 or the big winning opening for small winning 151) is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S173), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S174) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 20) (see S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S173), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S177, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of the big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening of the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S180.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 131 for the jackpot and the big winning hole 151 for the small win. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S180, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is generated. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S181) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S97 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process in S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning a prize opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S191), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole (for example, big winning hole count switch 132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6 for both) etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S192, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is not the maximum winning number (if S192 is NO), the main CPU 201 , the process moves to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number (when S192 is determined as YES) ), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 131, big winning opening for small winning 151) has not elapsed (if S193 is NO), the main CPU 201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S193 is YES), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for jackpot, big winning opening 151 for small winning). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S195) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S98 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

If it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S201), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S201), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, big winning opening number counter, big winning opening) are set or reset. A process is performed to set or reset the value of a prize winning counter, etc. In addition, the special symbol suspension flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the process of S203, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO in S211), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S211 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S213 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start process for normal symbols. This process of S213 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process for normal symbols. This process of S214 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S215 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S216.

In S216, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S216 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S217 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and 0 to 255 are used as normal symbol hit determination value data, for example. The normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data relative to the total random number of the normal symbol winning determination random numbers, so for example, the normal symbol winning probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal symbol winning probability is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 seconds, in a game state where time saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 second, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed. only is executed. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port. After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S223 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S223), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S225. On the other hand, if it is determined in S223 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S223), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S232). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S234), and moves the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored; if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S235), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Note that details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S235), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S235 that the game is allowed (YES in S235), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt-disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S239. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a transmission reservation process of the production control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S231, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed in S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S252). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S253 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S254). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257. .

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change processing (S252), setting confirmation processing (S254), or startup initialization processing (S25) are It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the setting change process performed at S252 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S261). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S261), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S263. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S261), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S263.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S263).

If it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S263), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S263), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed at S253 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the setting change process (see FIG. 34) described above.

If it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S272). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S264 during the setting change process (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed when the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17) is not for recovery from power outage, setting change, or setting confirmation, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs initialization RAM setting processing (S281). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-5-20. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S272 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon recovery from power failure (S291). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process (S291) after power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S292), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S292 that the probability variation flag is on (YES in S292), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power interruption. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the process of S294, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the switch input detection process performed in S240 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. Note that FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring processing (S301). Details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. Then, if the first starting port switch 121 and/or the second starting port switches 141A, 141B are on, the suspension addition command for the starting information of the first special symbol and/or the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved for transmission. Ru. In this case, for example, when a prefetch effect is executed, a specific pending addition command is transmitted that can identify that the prefetch effect is pending. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball related switch check process. This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. If the prize ball related switch is on, a prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Note that FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring preprocessing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information on various sensors set to the input port of the I/O port 205 is updated). After executing the process in S311, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S312. Move to.

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality for each of a plurality of monitoring items that are targets of abnormality detection and determination. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs induced magnetic field monitoring processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not an induced magnetic field is detected, and if an induced magnetic field is detected, an induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. After the process of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S321). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information of the production contents, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various production devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, etc.) requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S328.

In S328, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls all or some of the accessories forming the performance accessory group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6) based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. The controller performs drive control to operate a production drive motor (not shown) related to the performance. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, and the game state where right-handed hitting is recommended (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, In the time saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small winning rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 140A, 140B. The second special symbol game based on the above is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the first special symbol is used in any of the normal game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, and low-accuracy time-saving game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-precision non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot opening 131 will not be open, so the frequency at which the second starting opening 140B will be open in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that of the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper downward flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 140A. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 140A, 140B, the stop indicates a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximately), for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are executed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see Figure 12(B)), so small The winning frequency of game balls into the winning big prize opening 151 is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 140B is in an open state by executing the electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning in the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upward flowing path 107a are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the game ball hit right passes through the passage gate 126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived. When the normal electric accessory 146 operates and a game ball enters the second starting opening 140B, there is a possibility that the small winning large prize opening 151 will be opened. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12(A)), so if the second starting opening 140A, 140B is Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning jackpot 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[1-8. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 41, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting the signal from the first pachinko game machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the big winning hole (the big winning hole 131 for jackpot or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes will be awarded. When a ball is paid out and a game ball wins in the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the game ball enters the general winning hole. 122 (see FIG. 4), when a game ball wins, for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 43 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 43), and notes.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 43 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 43 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 43 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more; When there is an unejected game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151 (see Figure 4), or when there is a prize in the opening when the opening is not open, the opening of the opening will occur. This includes an abnormal discharge error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot prize opening 131, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends. In some cases, it is determined that it is an error if there is an abnormality in passing to a specific area, or if a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot jackpot 131. It is preferable to configure it so that.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first big jackpot jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot jackpot and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" from a speaker (see FIG. 6, for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 44, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. During the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a jackpot or a small win), signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal gaming state) is the signal output during the normal gaming state (other than during the jackpot/small win, during the probability change/time saving). It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). That is, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) executes the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small win game control process different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not in progress, the small win can be achieved at the pachinko machine to which the external information is transmitted. It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequentially variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a first starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. The condition for starting the second special symbol is that the first special symbol and the second special symbol This is true when certain requirements are satisfied, such as none of the above being displayed in a variable manner, not in a jackpot game state, and variable display of the second special symbol being suspended.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all of the conditions are satisfied, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are This is established when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the variable display is not in progress, that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 1010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general prize opening 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 1145, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko game machine. The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 1122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 46 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates a grand prize opening 1131, a count switch 1132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 46 described later), and a special electric accessory 1133. It is a unit body. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 1131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 1115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 1131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. state.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is designed so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side area 1107, for example, so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later). When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch that detects winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147 called a so-called electric chew, a shutter that can move forward and backward, for example, may be employed.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the large winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning holes 1122, and the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 1200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300, a payout/emission control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, and a general winning port switch 1123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 1184, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the setting key 1174 that is operated when changing or confirming the setting values, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 46, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 1006 for firing balls, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. Note that the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

The second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high precision time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and a high probability playing state in which probability variable control is not executed but time saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is recommended in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 47 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, a "jackpot" or This is a table that is referred to when determining a "loser" by lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "jackpot" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small wins) are not included, but the first starting opening 1120 and/or the second starting opening 1120 When a game ball wins at 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol hit determination process, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted jackpot determination random number. In the special symbol hit determination table, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range ( The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data is defined. There is.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 204, it is considered a "jackpot". The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." On the other hand, if the variable probability flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is not between 0 and 204, it will be determined as a "loss" and the determination will be made. The value data is determined to be "loss determination value data."

In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is between 0 and 935, it is determined to be a "jackpot", The judgment value data is determined to be "jackpot judgment value data." On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random value for determining a jackpot is not between 0 and 935, it is determined that it is a "lose", and the determination is made as follows. The value data is determined to be "loss determination value data."

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 1120, 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data. ” and “symbol designation command”. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Also, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol's hit judgment process, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the second special symbol's random number value from 0 to 99. First, "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the value of the time saving flag, the number of probability variations, and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state according to the winning selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. , and the number of time reductions, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, when the winning symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. In addition, when the winning symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the probability change flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined as follows. For example, if the winning symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the number of probability variations is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10,000”. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the probability change flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving times is determined to be "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 49 is just an example, and is not limited to this. As described above, when the value of the probability change flag is determined to be "0", the number of probability variations is not set, but the number of probability variations may be set to "0" to mean that probability variation control is not executed. .

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 1203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control. If the time-saving gaming state is such that the time-saving control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the time-saving flag is set to ON, and the gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set to OFF when the game is in the normal gaming state.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, the normal gaming state in this embodiment).

In addition, as mentioned above, the probability variation count of "10000" means that the probability variation control is performed until it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process that is executed in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (that is, the next jackpot). The aim is to be able to continue implementing it. Similarly, the time saving number of "10000" means that the time saving control can be continuously executed until the next jackpot.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 50 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 50 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or/ And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29 and 59), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S1004), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S1004), the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 performs the processing as follows. The process moves to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is withheld as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 1140.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S1003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target when S1004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1011), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1012, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1013. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processing from S1013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S1018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After completing the processing of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. In addition, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process in S1023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, jackpot or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1024, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 49) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023), the random value for reach determination and/or the random value for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process in S1026, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S1027, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 52) (see S1014) will be performed. After executing the process in S1028, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S1029, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1030, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S1030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1042, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1043, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of games may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 52). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1052, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45) via the external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S1053, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 (S1055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S1058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S1059). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 52) is performed. (see S1016) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S1061). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process in S1061, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1063). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1072, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 52) is performed. (see S1018) will be performed. After executing the process in S1074, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S1077, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 1131, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 1131, the number of prize balls when winning in the grand prize opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 1131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1078, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process in S1079, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1080) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1017 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process in S1080, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1081, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1091), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

On the other hand, in S1092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 1131 is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winnings (YES in S1092), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process. (See Figure 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 1131. After executing the process in S1094, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1095) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process in S1095, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1096, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

Note that the third pachinko game machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, we will explain the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 61) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting slot 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later) detects winning (passage) of game balls to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 61 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 2107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning hole 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When winning of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. and a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electricity shutter 2147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 61 described below) that operates the normal electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which game balls can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( For example, the V-attacker 2152 is activated once due to the operation of FIG. 61 (described later). When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the winning slot even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing winning slot 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is placed in the V prize opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Once entered, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2160 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly has a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, V shutter solenoid 2159, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 61, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 2007, for example.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 62 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the lottery result is determined as " It will be determined as a “Jackpot” or “Lose”. In addition, when a game ball enters (passes through) the second starting port 2140, the lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "jackpot" in the second special symbol's hit determination process using the second special symbol's random value for jackpot determination. It is determined that "per object release".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined as the "accessory object release hit". , it is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") compared to the case where the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on the probability of opening the accessory, or the probability may be lower than the probability determined based on the release of the accessory.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, “jackpot” or “loss” is stored as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined in , and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "accessories release hit determination value data") is defined.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. You can.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of time saving continuation may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. ” and “symbol designation command”. The "select symbol at hit command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of special symbols is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command will not be selected regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99. First, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the time saving flag, the number of time saving times, etc. referenced when determining the type of Note that the remarks column in FIG. 64 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the jackpot The number of time reductions after the gaming state is determined to be "4".

In addition, the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5", and "z6" are used when the judgment value data is "accessory release hit judgment value data" (in other words, when the result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol is This is a winning selection symbol command (in the case of an opening hit), and the V attacker 2152 opens due to the opening hit of the accessory, and the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is detected, and the jackpot game state is controlled. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions in each case are specified. Therefore, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit with the release of the accessory, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game state is not controlled, the jackpot game state will not be entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 65 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "performance content" column in FIG. 65 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 ( The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection obtained when the vehicle passes (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection obtained when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is recommended, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly enter the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 converts the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol into a performance obtained when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on a random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection obtained when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29 and 76), etc.) ), hereinafter, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S2003), the main CPU 2201 executes the process as follows. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol if S2003 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination, and the first special symbol is the processing target if S2004 of the special symbol control process is a YES determination. It is subject to processing.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 62) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or an opening hit. In the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a jackpot, it is determined that it is a loss. Similarly, in the second special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a jackpot, it is determined that it is an accessory opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63), the above-mentioned "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is, for example, a jackpot or an opening hit. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64) is referred to, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "select symbol command when winning" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). In addition, the type of jackpot that is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 that was opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and accessory openings, but there may be only one type of jackpot or accessory opening. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots and/or openings of accessories, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or/and the performance selection. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value and the like. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed. That will happen. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the jackpot game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that it is not the opening of the accessory, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, if it is determined that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening an accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and a transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. In addition, by performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S2071). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2073). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 67) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is greater than or equal to the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is greater than or equal to the maximum number of winning balls. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process. (See Figure 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 67) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. That will happen. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 70). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 70), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. In the case of the V winning game control started by YES in S2095 of 73, the V winning device 2150 (namely, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is used. At step 2153 (see FIG. 61), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is open, the specific area is also open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short time and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 77, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area in which it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Additionally, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z3" with a 15% selection rate and "z4" with a 50% selection rate. "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 79 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) in the third opening mode. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 77 to 79 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and a selection rate of 10%. A selection rate of 10R normal jackpot A is determined, and a selection rate of 50% determines a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 80, the opening may be opened in response to a game ball entering the grand prize opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be kept open for only one time or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is executed alternately and repeatedly until the limit is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are described. , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number (for example, a special symbol hit determination Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time saving win/loss determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to execute time saving control using a random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 21522152 opened it passes through the V winning hole 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only special figure shortening control is performed out of special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, for example, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened because the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory object is derived during execution of the time saving control. However, if the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate even after the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is closed. Continuously execute time saving control.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time-saving probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process. The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and receive rewards (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media held by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). or the payout operation of game media in the event that a win is won (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of game media (i.e., payout of game media to the player on the line, and payout of the necessary game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below like in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[5. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, a fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the fourth pachinko game machine is a so-called Type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi, and like the second pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are parallel to each other. Only one of the two is displayed variably. Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, the starting condition of the second special symbol is higher than the starting condition of the first special symbol, for example. It is a priority variable machine in which the following is established with priority, and is also a so-called ST machine. In particular, the fourth pachinko game machine is provided with a sorting device that electrically distributes the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory so that it starts to win either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This differs from the second pachinko game machine in this point. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the second pachinko game machine.

Below, in explaining the fourth pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 3184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the fourth pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 3186 (see FIG. 46) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the second pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the second pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the second pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the second pachinko game machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[5-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 81 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 included in the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 81, the game board unit 3010 mainly includes a game panel 3100 in which a game area 3105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow, a guide rail 3110, and approximately the center of the game area 3105. Center accessory 3115 placed in the section, general prize openings 3122A, 3122B, croon unit 3124, passing gate unit 3125, center entrance 3128, special electric accessory unit 3130, and normal electric accessory unit 3145, a starting winning accessory unit 3150, an LED unit 3160, an outlet 3178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 3010. Note that the LED unit 3160 is the same as the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this fourth pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 3100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 3007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 3100, a guide rail 3110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 3110 toward the game area 3105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 3105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 3100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 3100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 3100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 3100 may be made entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be made transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 3110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided). The game area 3105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 3110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 3006 (see FIG. 87) to the upper part of the game area 3105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 3115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 3100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 3116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 3105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 3116.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, as in the second pachinko game machine, the area on the left side of the center accessory 3115 in the game area 3105 is referred to as the left side area 3106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 3115 is referred to as a left side area 3106. is referred to as a right side area 3107.

The game ball fired toward the game area 3105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 3106 or the right side area 3107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 3106 or the right side area 3107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 3100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 3106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 3107. That is, the player can separately hit the game ball towards the left side area 3106 by hitting the ball left-handed, and towards the right area 3107 by hitting the ball right-handed.

In addition, the center accessory 3115 has a warp entrance 3117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 3106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 3117 is configured to be guided to a stage 3118 formed on the center accessory 3115. The stage 3118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left and right direction below and in front of the display area of the display device 3007. Note that the stage 3118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 3119 into which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the stage 3118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 3119 has a higher probability of entering the center than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 3117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 3117 but did not enter the chance entrance 3119. The ball enters (passes through) the opening 3128.

(Central entrance)
The center ball entrance 3128 is arranged directly below the chance entrance 3119 in the center accessory 3115. The game ball that enters (passes through) the central ball entrance 3128 enters the clone unit 3124.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 3122A are arranged at the lower left of the gaming area 3105, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). . When a game ball enters the general winning hole 3122A, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 3123A (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). One general winning opening 3122B is arranged at the lower right of the gaming area 3105, and among the game balls hit to the right, a special electric accessory unit 3130, a normal electric accessory unit 3145, and a starting winning accessory unit 3150 The arrangement is such that a game ball that is not captured by the player can win a prize (a game ball that is hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). Game nails are arranged around the general winning hole 3122B so that, for example, one out of every four balls can win, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole 3122B, the general winning hole switch 3123B (see FIG. 87 described later) is activated. Detected.

When the general winning hole switch 3123A (see FIG. 87 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 3122A, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 3122A is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the general winning hole 3122B is detected by the general winning hole switch 3123B (see FIG. 87 described later), for example, one prize ball is paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 3122B is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to one.

(Clune unit)
The clone unit 3124 includes a clone dish 3210, a first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later), and two passage gate switches 3127A (see FIG. 87 described later). The croon dish 3210 is disposed below the central ball entry port 3128 and has a shallow circular concave surface, with one first starting port 3120A and two standard starting ports 3220 formed around the center of the concave surface. has been done. The first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87, which will be described later) is arranged on the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the first starting port 3120A, and detects passage of the game ball. The passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87, which will be described later) is disposed on the transport route of the game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting port 3220, and detects the passage of the game ball. In addition, even if the passing gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87 described later) is provided at each of the two regular game starting ports 3220, one pass gate switch 3127A (see FIG. You can.

The game ball that enters (passes through) the central ball entry port 3128 is ejected to the outer periphery of the croon dish 3210 in the circumferential direction. The game ball released into the Cloon dish 3210 revolves around the outer periphery of the Cloon dish 3210, and as the transfer speed becomes slower, the game ball moves towards the center of the concave surface. Then, the game ball passes through either the first starting port 3120A and the two standard starting ports 3220, and then passes through the first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later) or the passage gate switch 3127A (described later). (see FIG. 87).

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 3120A is detected by the first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are used in the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern starting port 3220 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127A, various data related to the normal pattern (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the normal pattern, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Incidentally, even if passage of the game ball to the normal pattern starting port 3220 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127A, the prize ball is not paid out.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 3125 is arranged in the right side area 3107, and includes a passage gate 3126 configured to allow a right-handed game ball to pass through, and a passage gate switch 3127B that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 3126. (See FIG. 87, which will be described later). The passage gate unit 3125 is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145, and below the passage gate unit 3125, a special electric accessory unit 3130, a starting prize accessory unit 3150, and a general prize opening 3122B are arranged. Ru.

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 3126 is detected by the passing gate switch 3127B, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 3125 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127A, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 3125 may be arranged in the left region 3106 instead of or in addition to the right region 3107.

Further, the ordinary figure starting port 3220 and the passage gate 3126 may function as a trigger for operating the accessory continuous actuation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 87 described later), the accessory continuous operating device is activated, and the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. You can do it like this.

In this specification, the passing of the game ball to the normal pattern starting port 3220 and the passing gate 3126 is referred to as starting passage, and the normal pattern extracted by the passing of the game ball to either the normal pattern starting port 3220 and the passing gate 3126. Various data related to this (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of a normal symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension, and the starting information of the suspended normal symbol is also referred to as "the reserved ball of the normal symbol". In addition, the ordinary design is sometimes abbreviated as Fuzu.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a jackpot jackpot 3131, a jackpot jackpot count switch 3132 (see FIG. 87 described later), which detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131. , special electric accessories 3133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged approximately at the lower right part of the game area 3105.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 3115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot 3131 allows a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) to win (pass through) when controlled to a jackpot game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player. This is a winning opening that will be opened as follows. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 3132 (see FIG. 87 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 is not limited to 15 balls.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 that operates the special electric shutter 3134 (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot opening 3131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 from the closed state to the open state in the jackpot game state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state. The small winning game state is a gaming state in which it is possible to pay out a large amount of game balls as prize balls by playing a round game in which the big winning jackpot opening 3131 shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. , is different from a jackpot game state in that it is not played over multiple rounds. In addition, in the small winning game state, it is possible to repeat the open state and the closed state multiple times within a predetermined period.

In this embodiment, the big winning opening 3131 for the jackpot is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed and the small winning game control process is executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the opening 3131 is opened separately from the big winning opening 3131 for the jackpot. It is also possible to provide a large winning opening for small winning, open the large winning opening 3131 when executing the jackpot game control process, and open the large winning opening for small winning when executing the small winning game control process.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is arranged above the passage gate unit 3125 in the right area 3107 of the game area 3105, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole 3149, a normal electric accessory ball entry switch 3122 (see FIG. 87 described later) that detects winning of a game ball to this winning hole 3149, and a normal electric accessory 3146. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned winning hole 3149 is used as a general winning hole, and the above switch is used as a general winning hole switch.

The normal electric accessory 3146 includes a normal electricity shutter 3147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 87 described below) that operates the normal electricity shutter 3147. The normal electric accessory 3146, that is, the shutter 3147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the winning hole 3149, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 3149. It is configured to be able to transition to a state and a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 3147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, for example, a pair of blade members, called a so-called electric tulip, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

When the normal electric accessory unit 3145 is disposed on the game panel 3100, a transport path 3540 ( (see FIG. 82) is formed. Although the details will be described later, the destination of the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 is the first passage 3504 (see Fig. 82) or the second passage 3505 (see Fig. 82) heading towards the second actuation mechanism 3513 (see Fig. 82), and is distributed to the first actuation mechanism 3511 (see Fig. 82) or the second actuation mechanism 3513 (see Fig. 82). Pass through one of the following. As a result, either the first non-motorized accessory 3440 or the second non-motorized accessory 3441 becomes open.

(Start winning accessory unit)
The starting winning accessory unit 3150 is disposed below the passage gate unit 3125 and above the special electric accessory 3133 in the lower right area of the game area 3105. The starting winning accessory unit 3150 includes a first non-electric accessory 3440, a second non-electric accessory 3441, an outlet 3442, a cover plate 3443, etc., and is a unit body that integrates these members. When the starting winning accessory unit 3150 is arranged on the game panel 3100, the first non-electric accessory 3440 and the second non-electric accessory 3441 are placed below the passage gate 3126. 1 non-electric accessories 3440 are arranged in this order.

The first non-electric accessory 3440 includes a blade member 3510 rotatably attached to the main body of the starting winning accessory unit 3150, and a first operating mechanism 3511 ( (see FIG. 82). As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3510 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and its central portion is rotatably supported and rotates along the board surface of the game panel 3100. The blade member 3510 is switched by the first actuation mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) into an open state in which a game ball can easily ride on the inner surface of the blade member 3510 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride the game ball on the inner surface of the blade member 3510.

The second non-electric accessory 3441 includes a blade member 3512 rotatably attached to the main body of the starting winning accessory unit 3150, and a second operating mechanism 3513 ( (see FIG. 82). As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3512 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and the center portion thereof is rotatably supported and rotates along the board surface of the game panel 3100. The second actuation mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82) is switched between an open state in which the game ball easily rides on the inner surface of the wing member 3512 and a closed state in which it is difficult to get on the inner surface of the wing member 3512.
The first non-electric accessory 3440 is equipped with a first non-electric accessory activation switch 3514 (see FIG. 87) that detects the opening operation of the blade member 3510. Further, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is equipped with a second non-electric accessory activation switch 3515 (see FIG. 87) that detects the opening operation of the blade member 3512. When the first starting port switch 3121B or the second starting port switch 3141 detects a game ball, the main CPU 3201 (see FIG. 87) activates the first non-electric accessory activation switch 3514 or the second starting port switch 3514 or 2. If the non-electric accessory activation switch 3515 does not detect a game ball, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and a transmission reservation for a game abnormality detection command is made.

The first non-electric accessory 3440 and the second non-electric accessory 3441 are accessories generally called mechanical chews.

Although the details will be described later, the starting winning accessory unit 3150 transfers the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 to either the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82). It further includes a sorting device 3506 (see FIG. 82) for sorting. Therefore, either the blade member 3510 or the blade member 3512 will open when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures it.

The cover plate 3443 is a transparent decorative member that covers the lower right area of the game area 3105. The front sides of the first non-motorized accessory 3440, the second non-motorized accessory 3441, etc. are covered by a cover plate 3443. A guide path 3500 extending into a protrusion is formed on the back surface of this cover plate 3443, and when the cover plate 3443 is attached to the game panel 3100, the guide path 3500 is arranged below the passage gate unit 3125. .

The guide path 3500 includes a slope portion that extends diagonally to receive the game ball that has fallen from the passing gate unit 3125 side and guide it between the center accessory 3115 and the starting winning accessory unit 3150, and the lower end of this slope portion. and a guide portion toward the special electric accessory 3133 side. The guide portion is formed in three steps, and a hole is formed at the base of each step. In these two holes, the hole on the downstream side functions as the first starting port 3120B, the central hole functions as the out port 3442, and the hole on the upstream side functions as the second starting port 3140.

The rotation axis of the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 is arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the hole that functions as the first starting port 3120B, and in the closed state, the tip part is on the upstream side of the opening. By touching or approaching the first starting port 3120B, the blade member 3510 closes the first starting port 3120B. In the open state, the tip of the blade member 3510 moves away from the guide path 3500, thereby opening the first starting port 3120B and forming an arc-shaped slope on the blade member 3510 toward the first starting port 3120B. In this way, when the blade member 3510 is opened, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to ride, and the game ball riding on the blade member 3510 moves toward the first starting port 3120B side. That is, by opening the blade member 3510, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first starting port 3120B.

Similarly, the rotation axis of the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 is arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the hole functioning as the second starting port 3140, and in the closed state, the tip of the blade member 3512 The second starting port 3140 is closed by the blade member 3512 by contacting or approaching the upstream side of the opening. In the open state, the tip of the blade member 3512 moves away from the guide path 3500, thereby opening the second starting port 3140, and forming an arc-shaped slope toward the second starting port 3140 on the blade member 3512. In this way, when the blade member 3512 is opened, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to ride, and the game ball riding on the blade member 3512 moves toward the second starting port 3140 side. That is, by opening the blade member 3512, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140.

Outlet 3442 is arranged between second non-motorized accessory 3441 and first non-motorized accessory 3440 in guide path 3500. A game ball flowing down along the guide path 3500 often passes through the out port 3442, and it is relatively rare for a game ball to enter the out port 3442. The game ball that entered the out port 3442 is discharged to the outside of the game panel 3100 and does not return to the game area 3105 again.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120B, it is detected by the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the first starting ports 3120A and 3120B, it becomes a trigger for the first special symbol hit determination process.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 3120B is detected by the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are used in the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). No matter which of the second starting ports 3140 the game ball lands in, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the second starting port 3140 is detected by the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, one). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 3140 is not limited to this.

(Internal configuration of starting winning accessory unit 3150)
Here, the main parts of the internal configuration of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 will be explained with reference to FIG. 82.
The starting winning accessory unit 3150 further includes a common passage 3541, a first passage 3504, a second passage 3505, a sorting device 3506, a first operating mechanism 3511, and a second operating mechanism 3513. . The common passage 3541 extends vertically downward, one end of the common passage 3541 is connected to the exit of the conveyance path 3540, and the other end of the common passage 3541 branches into a first passage 3504 and a second passage 3505. are doing. The first passage 3504 extends diagonally downward with respect to the common passage 3541, and the second passage 3505 extends vertically downward following the common passage 3541.

In the first passage 3504, the second passage 3505, and the common passage 3541, a flat plate 3550 on which protrusions 3551 to 3556 are formed is arranged with a gap large enough to allow a game ball to pass through the back surface of the cover plate 3443. formed by. The common passage 3541 is formed between the protrusion 3555 and the protrusion 3556. The first passage 3504 is formed between the protrusion 3551 and the protrusion 3552. The second passage 3505 is formed between the protrusion 3553 and the protrusion 3554.

The protrusions 3555 and 3556 are arranged in parallel along the vertical direction at intervals that allow one game ball to pass through. The protrusion 3551 is formed in an obtuse L-shape, and extends diagonally downward from the lower end of the protrusion 3555 and further extends along the vertical direction. The protrusion 3554 extends along the lower end of the protrusion 3555 in the vertical direction. The protrusion 3552 and the protrusion 3553 are arranged inside the protrusion 3551 and the protrusion 3554, and the protrusion 3552 is formed in an obtuse L-shape and extends diagonally downward and further along the vertical direction. There is. The protrusion 3553 extends along the vertical direction. The length of the protrusion 3553 in the vertical direction is longer than the length of the vertically extending portion of the protrusion 3552, and the upper end of the protrusion 3553 is arranged at an interval that allows the game ball to pass through the lower end of the protrusion 3555. has been done. Therefore, the entrance of the first passage 3504 is lower than that of the second passage 3505. Further, the upper end of the protrusion 3553 is connected to the upper end of the protrusion 3552, and the portion of the protrusion 3552 extending diagonally downward is parallel to the portion of the protrusion 3551 extending diagonally downward.
A slit 3557 is formed in the protrusion 3554. The slit 3557 is formed at a portion of the protrusion 3554 that extends along the slope of the protrusion 3552.

(sorting device)
The distribution device 3506 is arranged in the area between the common passage 3541 and the second passage 3505.

The sorting device 3506 is for sorting game balls that are captured by the normal electric accessory 3146, pass through the common passage 3541, and fall from the exit of the common passage 3541 to either the first passage 3504 or the second passage 3505. be.

The sorting device 3506 includes a flat plate member 3531 and a sorting solenoid 3532 (see FIG. 87) that slides the flat plate member 3531 in an oblique direction. The flat plate member 3531 is disposed diagonally above the entrance of the second passage 3505 and has a size capable of closing the second passage 3505. Further, the flat plate member 3531 can be slid in a diagonal direction, and by sliding the plate member 3531, it is possible to switch between a state in which the entrance to the second passage 3505 is closed and a state in which the entrance to the second passage 3505 is opened. be.

Power supply control to the distribution solenoid 3532 is performed by the main CPU 3201. When the distribution solenoid 3532 is not energized, the entrance of the second passage 3505 is closed by the flat plate member 3531. When the distribution solenoid 3532 is energized to change the solenoid core, the flat plate member 3531 moves obliquely upward and the entrance of the second passage 3505 is opened. At this time, substantially the entire flat plate member 3531 moves to the outside.

Since the cover plate 3443 is made of a transparent member, the operation of the flat plate member 3531 and how the game balls are sorted by the sorting device 3506 can be visually recognized by the player.

[Operation of sorting device 3506]
FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of the game ball when the power supply to the distribution device 3506 is off. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of the game ball when the distribution device 3506 is energized. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the board surface of the game panel 3100 when the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the board surface of the game panel 3100 when the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513.

When the distribution device 3506 is turned off, the second passage 3505 is closed by the distribution device 3506, as shown in FIG. 83. In this state, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the game ball passes through the first actuation mechanism 3511, and the first actuation mechanism 3511 is interlocked with the passage of the game ball, as shown in FIG. Then, the blade member 3510 (see FIG. 81) of the first non-electric accessory 3440 (see FIG. 81) in the closed state is switched to the open state as shown in FIG. Note that if the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511 while the blade member 3510 is in the open state, the blade member 3510 is maintained in the open state. When the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when it captures the second game ball, it becomes the closed state. In addition, when the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures two game balls at the same time in the open state, or when it captures two game balls at the same time after capturing one game ball, it becomes the closed state. Although it is assumed that the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 is in the closed state when it captures two game balls in the open state, it may be in the closed state when it captures one game ball.

When the distribution device 3506 is energized, the second passage 3505 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 84. In this state, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the game ball passes through the second actuation mechanism 3513, and the second actuation mechanism 3513 is in the closed state in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. The blade member 3512 (see FIG. 81) of the second non-electric accessory 3441 (see FIG. 81) is switched to the open state as shown in FIG. Note that if the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513 while the blade member 3512 is in the open state, the blade member 3512 is maintained in the open state. When the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when the second game ball is captured, it becomes the closed state. In addition, when the second non-electric accessory 3441 captures two game balls at the same time in the open state, or when it switches to the open state and captures one game ball and then captures two game balls at the same time, it also becomes the closed state. In addition, although the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 is in the closed state when it captures two game balls in the open state, it may be in the closed state when it captures one game ball.

When the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87) or the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87) detects the game ball captured by the first non-electric accessory 3440 or the second non-electric accessory 3441, , a predetermined number of game balls are given to the player as prize balls. Further, when the normal electric accessory ball entry switch 3122 (see FIG. 87) detects a game ball, a predetermined number of game balls are given to the player as prize balls. In other words, when the game ball is captured by the normal electric shutter 3147 of the normal electric accessory 3146, the prize ball is awarded to the player. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the game ball captured by the normal electric shutter 3147 of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 always passes through the ordinary electric accessory ball entry switch 3122 after being captured, Since a prize ball is awarded to the player when the input ball switch 3122 detects a game ball, the capture of a game ball by the normal electric accessory 3146 also includes the meaning of winning a prize. Furthermore, even when the game balls are sorted to the first passage 3504 or the second passage 3505 by the sorting device 3506, it becomes easier for the game balls to start winning in the first starting opening 3120B or the second starting opening 3140, so that the player receives a prize. You will be given an opportunity to acquire the ball.

According to the fourth pachinko game machine described above, the normal electric accessory 3146, the second non-electric accessory 3441, and the first non-electric accessory 3440 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. The order of objects does not matter as long as they are placed in the right area 3107 of the game area 3105.

(Out port)
In FIG. 81, the out port 3178 includes various winning ports (for example, first starting ports 3120A, 3120B, second starting port 3140, jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131, general winning port 3122A) , 3122B, etc.) are used to discharge game balls that did not win any prizes to the outside of the machine. This out port 3178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 3105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 3178, an outlet is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, below the general prize opening 3122B or in the croon dish 3210, to discharge the game balls flowing down the game area 3105 to the outside of the machine. You can do it like this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 3010 similarly to the second pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 3100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 3058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 3300 (see FIG. 87 described later). The performance accessory group 3058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 3007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 3058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 87 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 87, the fourth pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 3200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 3300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 3400 and a power supply circuit 3450.

[5-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 3200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 3201, a main ROM 3202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 3203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 3204, a backup capacitor 3207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 3202, a main RAM 3203, an initial reset circuit 3204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 3201. The main CPU 3201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 3202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the fourth pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 3201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 3201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 3202.

The main RAM 3203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 3203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 3201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 3201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 3204 monitors the main CPU 3201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 3207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 3203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 3200 includes an I/O port 3205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 3206 that is connected to enable output of various commands to the sub-control circuit 3300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 3200. For example, the main control circuit 3200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 3161, normal symbol reserve display section 3162, first special symbol display section 3163, second special symbol display section 3164, and first special symbol reserve display section 3165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 3166, a general electricity solenoid 3148, a special electricity solenoid 3135, a distribution solenoid 3532, etc. are connected. In addition to these, a performance display monitor 3170, an error notification monitor 3172, etc. are also connected to the main control circuit 3200. Main control circuit 3200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 3205.

The performance display monitor 3170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. to be described later, under the control of the main CPU 3201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 3172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 3172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 3200 includes first starting opening switches 3121A, 3121B, second starting opening switch 3141, passing gate switches 3127A, 3127B, big winning opening counting switch 3132, normal electric utility ball entry switch 3122, General winning a prize opening switches 3123A, 3123B, a first non-electric accessory activation switch 3514, a second non-electric accessory activation switch 3515, etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 3200 via I/O port 3205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 3200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 3186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 3184, a setting key 3174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 3203 can be accessed by the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 3176, etc., which can be cleared according to the operation of , is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 3176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 3174 and backup clear switch 3176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 3174 and backup clear switch 3176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 3174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 3176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are connected to the main control circuit 3200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the gaming parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176.

[5-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 3300 includes a sub CPU 3301, a program ROM 3302, a work RAM 3303, a display control circuit 3304, an audio control circuit 3305, an LED control circuit 3306, an accessory control circuit 3307, a command input port 3308, and the like. The sub control circuit 3300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 3200. Although not shown in FIG. 87, the sub-control circuit 3300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 3302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the fourth pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 3301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 3301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 3302. In particular, the sub CPU 3301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 3200.

The work RAM 3303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 3301.

The display control circuit 3304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 3007. The display control circuit 3304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 3304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 3301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and presentation image data.

Then, the display control circuit 3304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 3007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 3007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 3007. In this way, the display control circuit 3304 can control the display device 3007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 3305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 3305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 3301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 3306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 3306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 3307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 3307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which movement patterns are stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 3307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 3301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 3301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 3308 is connected to command output port 3206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 3200.

The payout/launch control circuit 3400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 3400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 3180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 3400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 3200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 3082 and controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 3182 is connected to the card unit 3180. The ball rental operation panel 3182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 3180. The payout/launch control circuit 3400 controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 3180. Note that although the operation panel 3182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 3180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 3400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 3450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 3200, sub control circuit 3300, payout/launch control circuit 3400, etc.

A power switch 3095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 3450. The power switch 3095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 3200, the sub-control circuit 3300, the payout/shooting control circuit 3400, etc.).

The game flow of the fourth pachinko game machine is similar to the game flow of the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 7, so the explanation will be omitted.

[5-3. Basic specifications of the fourth pachinko machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the fourth pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.
The fourth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state (sometimes abbreviated as normal state) in which neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed, a high probability time saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time saving control are executed, and A low-probability time-saving gaming state is prepared in which probability-varying control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 3201 is able to advance the game in any one of these gaming states. . However, the gaming state advanced under the control of the main CPU 3201 is not limited to this, and may include a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is executed but time-saving control is not executed. Further, any one of the normal gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state may not be proceeded with. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, as time saving control, control is performed to activate time saving a, b working time, and c working time saving by satisfying a predetermined condition. Details of a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving will be described later.

Furthermore, in the fourth pachinko game machine, left-handed playing is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is recommended in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended way of hitting, for example, in the display area of the display device 4007. In addition, even if you shift from the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state or the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, you cannot immediately shift to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state again. If it is determined, a display recommending right-handed hitting may be displayed even in the normal gaming state or the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state.

[Jackpot, small hit probability]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 3201 detects winning of game balls into the first starting ports 3120A and 3120B, the main CPU 3201 extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter, the (referred to as 1 special symbol lottery or special symbol 1 lottery), the jackpot determination for the extracted random number for jackpot determination is performed with reference to the hit determination table (not shown) of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 3203. conduct.

In addition, when the main CPU 3201 detects winning of a game ball into the second starting port 440, it extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol lottery or special symbol lottery). 2 lottery), a jackpot judgment is made for the extracted random numbers for jackpot judgment with reference to a hit judgment table (not shown) of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 3203.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the probability of determining a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is approximately 1/319 in a low probability state and approximately 1/99 in a high probability state. The probability of a small hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is 0. The probability of a jackpot determination in the second special symbol lottery is 0, and the probability of a small hit determination is approximately 317/319 in a low probability state and approximately 97/99 in a high probability state. Here, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, in the high probability non-time saving game state, there is a function that supports winning to the second starting opening 3140 by operating the normal electric accessory 3146, the so-called electric chew support. Since there is no prize, it is difficult to win in the second starting port 3140. In addition, although details will be described later, in the high probability time-saving game state, even if the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the first non-electric accessory 3440 opens and the first starting port 3120 enters the prize. It is difficult to enter the second starting slot 3140. As described above, since it is difficult to win a prize at the second start opening 3140 in a high probability state, it is difficult to win a small win in a variable probability state which is a high probability state. Incidentally, a jackpot may be included in the hit determination table of the second special symbol of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, for example, a jackpot may be won at a rate of approximately 1/319 in a low probability state and approximately 1/99 in a high probability state. It may be set to Furthermore, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the second special symbol lottery is almost always a small win, and there is no need for an effect that makes people expect a transition to a small win game state, so that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, a short-time variation pattern is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the state shifts to a jackpot game state due to a jackpot win in the special drawing lottery, a round game with the number of rounds of "10" is executed. One round ends when 10 game balls win prizes or when the release time elapses for 30 seconds, and this round is repeated 10 times. When a small winning game state is entered due to a small winning winning in the special drawing lottery, the big winning opening 3131 for jackpot is opened 10 times. At this time, one opening time is set to such a degree that one game ball can win a prize.

[Number of prize balls]
When a prize is won in the jackpot jackpot 3131, 15 game balls are paid out. When a prize is won in the first starting openings 3120A and 3120B, four game balls are paid out. When a prize is won at the second starting opening 3140, 15 game balls are paid out. When a prize is won in the jackpot jackpot 3131, 15 game balls are paid out. When a prize is won in the general winning slot 3122A, four game balls are paid out. When a prize is won in the general winning hole 3122B, one game ball is paid out. When winning the normal electric accessory 3146, one game ball is paid out.

[Time-saving game]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, if any of the following three conditions are met, the game enters the time saving state.
・After the jackpot ends (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a time saving)
・When the number of drawings related to the activation of the conditional device, that is, the number of changes in the special symbol, reaches the specified number of activations n (hereinafter sometimes referred to as b time saving)
・When the combination of special symbols is a predetermined combination that is not a jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as c-time saving)

(a time saving)
In the case of time saving a, the number of time saving times N can be set arbitrarily. However, in the case of having b time saver, it is desirable that the number of time savers N in the low-accuracy time saver game state is set to the number of times b time saver does not operate (for example, less than the number of operations n). In the fourth pachinko game machine, after the jackpot ends, the game enters a high-accuracy time-saving game state, and a time-saving number of "160" is given.

(B time saving)
b In the case of time saving, the number of operations n shall be within the following range.
2.5/ML≦n≦3.0/ML (ML is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability in a low probability state)
Note that the number of operations n is always counted during low probability, regardless of whether or not there is time saving. Further, although it is desirable not to count the number of special symbol fluctuations during high probability, the present invention does not exclude counting the number of special symbol fluctuations during high probability.
There are three clear patterns for the number of operations n:
When the RAM is cleared When the RAM is cleared due to a setting change When the condition device is activated or terminated The count of the number of operations n is the sum of the special map 1 and the special map 2. In other words, it is impossible to count only the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 even though it has the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is impossible to determine the value of the number of operations n for each setting. Note that b time saving is similar to the ceiling function in a pachi-slot machine in that it is activated after the number of activations n has been reached, so it is sometimes referred to as ceiling time saving.
Although the number of time saving times N can be set as appropriate, it is desirable that it be within the range of N≦3.8/ML. Here, it is preferable that the time saving number N be set to a plurality of number patterns such as 100 times, 200 times, etc., but in the present invention, setting a plurality of number patterns is possible. This does not exclude that. Furthermore, although it is possible for the winning probability of the common drawing lottery to shift to a high probability state, it is desirable not to shift to a high probability state. However, the present invention does not exclude the transition to a high probability state in the general drawing lottery. For example, even if the general lottery is in a high probability state, if the winning probability is not much different from the winning probability in the normal game state, the winning probability may be shifted to the high probability state.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is approximately 319, the number of operations n is set to, for example, 850 times, and the time saving number N can be set to a value of ``1200 times'' or less after reaching the number of operations n. be. In the fourth pachinko game machine, when b time saving is activated, "1200 times" is set as the number of time saving times N, and in conjunction with this, a special figure 2 variation "1 time" is given. That is, the end condition for b time saving is the case where either the special figure 1 variation "1200 times" or the special figure 2 variation "1 time" is satisfied. In the time saving state (b time saving), an opening pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation is performed at a high speed or a long opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is more likely to be selected than in the normal state, and the average opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is longer.

It is noted that there is no need to display a special symbol when the specified number of operations n has been reached, and the specification is such that if it is a loss, a loss symbol is displayed, and if it is a small win, a small win symbol is displayed. Further, as the variation pattern of the special symbol when the number of operations reaches n, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected only in the variation pattern table selected after the hit. Furthermore, if the small win is won when the number of operations reaches n, it is necessary to operate both the time saving and the small win. Furthermore, if both time savings b and time savings c are established at the same time, it is necessary to determine which one to give priority to through a program.

(C time saving)
c Time saver operates after a specific special symbol combination is displayed. c The time saving operation is effective only when the special drawing lottery is in a low probability non-time saving state. Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is impossible to determine the probability of winning a time-saving symbol for each setting. The shift to c-time saving is determined by lottery using jackpot random numbers. The number of time saving times N associated with winning time saving symbols can be set as appropriate, but it is desirable to set it within the range of N≦3.8/ML. However, it is preferable not to set multiple frequency patterns (for example, 20 times, 50 times, etc.) for time saving in b, but it is preferable to set multiple frequency patterns (for example, 20 times, 50 times, etc.) for c. time saving. is possible, and which number of times to play in a plurality of number patterns may be determined using a jackpot random number or a symbol random number of a time-saving symbol. Moreover, the lottery probabilities of the symbols that shift to c time saving may be different between the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, it is desirable that the winning probability of the general drawing lottery is not shifted to a high probability state after the display of a specific special symbol combination that shortens the c time. Note that even if the normal drawing lottery is in a high probability state, the winning probability is not much different from the winning probability in the normal gaming state (for example, the probability of winning a common drawing in the normal gaming state is 1/200, and the winning probability in the normal gaming state is 1/200, If the figure winning probability is 1/199.2), the state may be shifted to a high probability state.

For b time saving and c time saving, in addition to the time saving number N (the sum of the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2), the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2, the number of small hits, etc. are set as the end condition for time saving. It is possible to use them together.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is approximately 319, the time saving number N can be set to a value of, for example, "1200 times" or less after the combination of time saving symbols is displayed. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when c time saving is activated, "1200 times" is set as the number of time saving times N, and in conjunction with this, a special figure 2 variation "1 time" is given. That is, the end condition for c time saving is the case where either the special figure 1 variation "1200 times" or the special figure 2 variation "1 time" is satisfied. In the time saving state (c time saving), an opening pattern in which normal pattern variation is performed at a high speed or a long opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is more likely to be selected than in the normal state, and the average opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 becomes longer.

For the convenience of the following explanation, the state in which a time saver is operating may be referred to as the a time saver state, the state in which b time saver is operating as b time saver state, and the state in which c time saver is operating as c time saver state. be. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of time reductions in a time reduction, b time reduction, and c time reduction are different from each other, and b time reduction and c time reduction are the number of time reduction times, the normal pattern fluctuation time during time reduction, and the normal pattern fluctuation time. They have the same probability of winning and perform the same actions. Therefore, the a time saving state, the time saving state b, and the time saving state c are collectively referred to as the time saving game state, and furthermore, the time saving state a is collectively referred to as the first time saving gaming state, and the time saving state b and the time saving state c are collectively referred to as the second time saving gaming state. Sometimes referred to as

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the time saving game state ends when the special symbols start changing according to the final time saving number. Incidentally, the time saving game state may end at the time when the special symbols start changing according to the last time saving number of times.

Although the fourth pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine, it is also possible to install the b time saving and c time saving in a so-called type 1 type 2 type pachinko game machine like the third pachinko. It is. However, in the case of type 1 and type 2 pachinko gaming machines, they do not have a high probability gaming state, and the normal symbol fluctuation time or normal symbol stop in the normal state, a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state, and c time-saving gaming state. The time and probability of winning the general drawing lottery are the same.

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, a time saving can be activated via a jackpot even if time saving a is overlapped with a time saving middle, b time saving middle, and c time saving middle. Time saving b cannot be activated if time saving a and b time saving overlap, but it can be activated if time saving c overlaps. However, it is necessary to keep the performance of time saving b and c time saving (variation time of ordinary electricity, stop time of ordinary electricity, opening time of ordinary electricity, probability of ordinary electricity, etc.) the same. The time saving c cannot be operated even if it overlaps with the time saving a, the b working time, and the c working time saving. If time savings do not overlap, even if one time reduction occurs during the other time reduction, the other time reduction will be ignored. In the case of multiple time reductions, if the other time reduction is established during one time reduction, the number of time reductions is the number of time reductions that has a larger number of fluctuations. Regarding time saving performance when time saving overlaps, if one time saving is achieved during the other time saving, the performance of the one time saving that was being executed is maintained regardless of the number of fluctuations. In addition, in this invention, when the other time saving is established during one time saving, the other time saving may be activated.

[Operation pattern of ordinary electric accessories and sorting device]
FIG. 88 is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 in the case of winning the normal symbol lottery, and FIG. 88(a) shows the pattern in the normal state (hereinafter referred to as 88(b) is a pattern in the time saving state a (hereinafter referred to as opening pattern 2), and FIG. 88(c) is a pattern in the time saving state b and c (hereinafter referred to as the opening pattern). 3).
When winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, the normal electric accessory 3146 repeatedly opens and closes, as shown in FIG. 88(a), and opens 10 times within a predetermined time. The device is in a closed state from the end of opening to the start of the next opening, and the time for being in the closed state is set longer than the opening time. As shown in FIG. 88(a), the distribution device 3506 is energized at the timing when the normal electric accessory 3146 is in the open state. In other words, in the normal state, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball after winning the general drawing lottery, the second actuation mechanism 3513 operates and the second non-electric accessory 3441 becomes open. Therefore, it becomes easier for the special drawing 2 lottery to be held.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the a time saving state, the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened nine times within a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 88(b). The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the reverse of the timing of opening and closing in the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 shown in FIG. 88(a). The sorting device 3506 has the same sorting pattern as in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 88(b). In other words, in the time-saving state a, when you win the normal drawing lottery and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the first actuation mechanism 3511 is activated and the first non-electric accessory 3440 is in the open state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the special drawing 1 lottery to be held.

In addition, in the time saving state a, when winning the regular drawing lottery, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 becomes longer than in the normal state, so the normal electric accessory 3146 becomes easier to catch the game ball.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the time saving state b or the time saving state c, the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened once and then closed, as shown in FIG. 88(c). The sorting device 3506 opens at the timing when the normal electric accessory 3146 opens. In other words, in the b time saving state and the c time saving state, when you win the normal drawing lottery and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the second actuation mechanism 3513 is activated and the second non-electric accessory 3441 is activated. Since it is in the open state, it becomes easier for the special drawing 2 lottery to be performed.

Note that the timing of energizing the sorting device 3506 may be delayed by the time for the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 to reach the sorting device 3506. As a result, the game ball captured by the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the normal state is transferred to the second operating mechanism 3513 side (special figure 2 side), and the game ball captured by the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the time saving state is transferred to the first operating mechanism. The 3511 side (special map 1 side) allows for reliable sorting.

In order to perform a regular game lottery in a normal state, you can either hit left-handed and let the game ball enter the regular game starting port 3220 of the croon unit 3124, or hit right and let the game ball enter the passing gate 3126. It will be one of two things. According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 is configured such that in a normal state, the base is higher when playing left-handed than when playing right-handed. Therefore, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to play left-handed.

[Puzu Winning in Normal Conditions]
FIG. 89 shows the normal electric accessory 3146, the sorting device 3506, the second non-electric accessory activation switch 3515, the second non-electric accessory 3441, and the jackpot jackpot 3131 in the case of winning a general figure in the normal state. It is a time chart showing state transition. In the fourth embodiment, when a normal figure is won in the normal state, there is a case where a game ball enters the normal figure starting opening 3220 of the clone unit 3124.

For example, when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting port 3220 of the croon unit 3124, the normal pattern changes and stops. When the normal symbol stops in a winning manner, the normal electric accessory 3146 is released. At this time, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the game ball is distributed to the special map 2 side because the sorting device 3506 is energized, and the second non-electric accessory activation switch 3515 captures the game ball. Immediately after the detection, the second non-electric accessory 3441 enters the open state. The second non-electric accessory 3441 captures the two game balls and enters the closed state. When the second non-electric accessory 3441 captures the two game balls, the two game balls enter the second starting opening 3140. If you enter the second starting slot 3140, you will win a small win with a high probability, so the small win game will be played twice. Specifically, the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 is opened 10 times in one small winning game, so the jackpot jackpot 3131 is opened 20 times in total. At this time, the opening time for one time is set to a length that allows one game ball to be captured. In other words, the interval from when the normal electric accessory 3146 opens and closes until the next opening starts is set to a time that allows the jackpot prize opening 3131 to be opened 20 times. After the two small winning games are completed, the second normal electric accessory 3146 is opened. After the second normal electric accessory 3146 is released, the small winning game is played twice in the same way as the first time. Since the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened 10 times, the two small winning games are repeated 10 times.
In this way, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when a regular symbol lottery is won in the normal state and the game shifts to a regular symbol winning game, a small winning game in which 10 game balls can be won is executed 20 times. Therefore, the normal symbol per game is executed over a relatively long period of time.

[Popular drawing winning in a time-saving state]
In the time saving state a, the game proceeds by letting the game ball enter the passing gate 3126 by hitting right as described above. If a normal figure is won in the a time saving state, the sorting device 3506 operates in a pattern in which the opening and closing timings of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 are reversed. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the sorting device 3506 is not energized, so as shown in FIG. Immediately after the object activation switch 3514 is turned on, the first non-electric accessory 3440 enters the open state. Then, the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures the two game balls and enters the closed state. The game ball captured by the first non-electric accessory 3440 enters the first starting opening 3120B. Then, when the special drawing 1 lottery is won, a jackpot game is executed.

If a jackpot game is won during a normal symbol winning game, the normal symbol winning game is forcibly terminated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball before the game ball flows down to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131 during a jackpot game, and the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131 cannot capture it. can.

In addition, in the time saving state a, the time when the normal electric accessory 3146 is in the open state becomes longer, and the ordinary electric accessory 3146 captures many game balls, but on the other hand, the ordinary electric accessory 3146 on the upstream side Since the game ball is captured, it becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down to the first non-electric accessory 3440 side. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures a plurality of game balls, the first game ball opens the first non-electric accessory 3440, but the game balls flow down to the first non-electric accessory 3440 side. Therefore, it is difficult to close the first non-electric accessory 3440. Therefore, even if the next game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511, the first non-electric accessory 3440 remains in the open state, and when the normal electric accessory 3146 is in the closed state, the normal electric accessory 3146 When the game ball that is not captured by enters the first non-electric accessory 3440, the first non-electric accessory 3440 enters the closed state. As a result, in the time saving state a, as in the normal state, the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures two game balls by opening the normal electric accessory 3146 once.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200 include the addition of some processes to the processes executed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). , with changes made.
Specifically, the following processing additions and changes have been made.
Next to the normal symbol control process performed in S40 shown in FIG. 16, as shown in FIG. 90, a sorting device control process performed in S4010 and a non-motorized accessory management process performed in S4020 are added. The distribution device control process will be described later using FIG. 91. The non-motorized accessory management process determines the states of the first non-motorized accessory 3440 and the second non-motorized accessory 3441 based on the state of the first non-motorized accessory activation switch 3514 or the second non-motorized accessory activation switch 3515. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, a gaming abnormality detection command is sent to the main CPU 3201.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine executes the gaming state management process performed in S1030 shown in FIG. 53. In this process, the main CPU 3201 updates the probability change flag, time saving flag, and the like. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, there are a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and a second time-saving game state (b time-saving or c time-saving) as time-saving game states, so the conditions for transition to the first time-saving game state When the first time saving flag is satisfied, the first time saving flag is turned on, and when the condition for ending the first time saving game state is satisfied, the first time saving flag is turned off. Similarly, when the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state are met, the second time-saving flag is turned on, and when the conditions for ending the second time-saving gaming state are met, the second time-saving flag is turned on. It turns off.

Further, the second pachinko gaming machine executes the processing performed in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. 25. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a jackpot, the special electric accessory 1133 is driven to open the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in the case of a small win, the small win solenoid 1154 is driven. Then, the small winning big prize opening 1151 is opened. According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 3201 performs control to drive the special electric accessory 3133 to open the jackpot jackpot prize opening 3131 in both cases of jackpot and small jackpot.

Further, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, a part of the normal symbol variable display start processing performed in S213 shown in FIG. 30 has been changed. Details will be described later using FIGS. 92 and 93.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, other processes other than those described above are the same as those in the second embodiment. Therefore, descriptions of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted.

(Distribution device control process)
The subroutine (distribution device control process) executed in step S4010 in FIG. 90 will be explained using FIG. 91.

In step S4030, the main CPU 3201 moves the process to step S4031 when the control state number of the normal symbol is a value (3) indicating a normal electric prize release, and does not have a value (3) indicating a normal electric prize release. If so, this subroutine ends.

In step S4031, the main CPU 3201 sets a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 3121 in the main RAM 3203 based on the distribution pattern as shown in FIG. 88 stored in the main RAM 3203. By outputting this control signal from each port in step S45, solenoid power is supplied to the distribution solenoid 3121 (see FIG. 87), and the distribution device 3506 is driven. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. Note that the sorting device control process may be executed, for example, in the normal electric accessory release process (see FIG. 30) in step S216.

[Normal symbol variable display start processing]
The subroutine (normal symbol variable display start process) executed in step S213 of FIG. 30 will be explained using FIG. 92.

In the normal symbol variable display start process, as shown in FIG. 92, in step S4041, the main CPU 3201 determines whether the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating the normal symbol variable display start process. Further, when the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 3201 moves to the process of step S4042, and the normal control state number starts the normal symbol variable display start process. If the value is not the indicated value (0), this subroutine ends.

In step S4042, the main CPU 3201 determines whether the value of the normal symbol reservation storage number data (reservation number) stored in the main RAM 3203 is "0". If the value of the normal symbol retention memory number data (reservation number) is not "0", the process moves to step S4043, and if the value of the normal symbol retention memory number data (reservation number) is "0", , the process moves to step S4051.

In step S4043, it is determined whether the first time saving flag is on. In this process, if the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time saving flag is on, the process moves to step S4044. On the other hand, if the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time-saving flag is not on, that is, if it determines that the first time-saving game state is not present, the process advances to step S4045.

In step S4044, a process is performed to determine a normal symbol hit with a high probability. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to the hit determination table with a high winning probability, and uses the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B included in the starting memory when the game ball passes through. It is determined whether or not the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted at that time matches. If they match, you win; if they don't match, you lose. If this process is completed, the process moves to step S4046.

In step S4045, a process is performed to determine a normal symbol hit with a low probability. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to a hit determination table with a low winning probability, and uses the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B included in the starting memory when the game ball passes through. It is determined whether or not the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted at that time matches. If they match, you win; if they don't match, you lose. That is, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the probability of winning the regular game lottery in the first time-saving game state is high, and the winning probability of the regular game lottery in the normal state and the second time-saving gaming state is low. If this process is completed, the process moves to step S4046.

In step S4046, an opening pattern setting process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 3201 sets the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 shown in FIG. 88, that is, the drive pattern of the ordinary electric solenoid 3148. If this process is completed, the process moves to step S4047.

In step S4047, the main CPU 3201 sets a normal symbol production start command in the main RAM 3203. The normal symbol production start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 3300 by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200. The normal symbol performance start command includes data such as the gaming state, the fluctuation time, the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146. The sub CPU 3301 of the sub control circuit 3300 starts the production based on the received normal symbol production start command. If this process is completed, the process moves to step S4048.

In step S4048, the main CPU 3201 sets a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) to the normal symbol waiting time timer. If this process is completed, the process moves to step S4049.

In step S4049, the main CPU 3201 sets a value (1) indicating the end of the normal symbol variable display to the normal control state number. When this process is completed, the process moves to step S4050.

In step S4050, the main CPU 3201 clears the storage area used for the current fluctuation. When this process is completed, this subroutine is ended.

In step S4051, the main CPU 3201 performs normal symbol demonstration display processing. When this process is completed, this subroutine is ended.

[Opening pattern setting process]
The subroutine (opening pattern setting process) executed in step S4046 in FIG. 92 will be explained using FIG. 93.

In step S4061, a process is performed to determine whether or not the second time saving game state is established. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state based on the presence or absence of the second time-saving flag. If it is determined that it is the second time saving game state, the process moves to step S4062. If it is not determined that it is the second time saving game state, the process moves to step S4063.

In step S4062, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to an opening pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 3441, that is, opening pattern 3 shown in FIG. 88 as an opening pattern. . When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S4063, a process is performed to determine whether or not the first time saving game state is established. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining whether the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state based on the presence or absence of the first time-saving flag. If it is determined that the game is in the first time saving game state, the process moves to step S4064. If it is not determined that the state is the first time saving game state, the process moves to step S4065.

In step S4064, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to an opening pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 3440, that is, opening pattern 2 shown in FIG. 88 as an opening pattern. . When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S4065, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to an opening pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 3441, that is, opening pattern 1 shown in FIG. 88 as an opening pattern. . When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[5-5. Game state transition]
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in a game using the fourth pachinko game machine.

In many cases, at the beginning of the game, the game is started from a normal state. In the normal state, the game is played by hitting the ball left-handed and aiming for the ball to enter the center ball entrance 3128. When the game ball enters the central ball entry port 3128, the game ball moves to the croon dish 3210 and passes through either the first starting port 3120A or the regular pattern starting port 3220. The passing of the game ball to the first starting port 3120A triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (first bonus). As mentioned above, the jackpot winning probability in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/319, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 10 rounds. In addition, one round ends when 10 game balls are won or the release time elapses for 30 seconds, and the number of prize balls that are won in the jackpot jackpot jackpot 3131 is 15, so the prizes that can be won through jackpot games The number of balls is approximately 1,500.

After the end of the jackpot game state (first bonus) that was entered by the jackpot winning of the special drawing 1 drawing, the probability of winning the jackpot of the special drawing 1 drawing shifts to a high probability state of 1/99.9, and the time saving number of times is 160. Transition to the first time saving game state (a time saving). If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the first time-saving gaming state (a time saving), you will move to the jackpot gaming state (first bonus), and after the end of the jackpot gaming state (first bonus), the special drawing 1 drawing will be in a high probability state. At the same time, the time saving number is reset to 160. When the 160 time saving times are used up, the state shifts to a normal state (low probability non-time saving state).

On the condition that the number of special symbol variations (total number of special symbol 1 variations and special symbol 2 variations) in the low probability state of the special lottery has reached 850, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is entered. The number of times saved is ``1200 times'' and the special figure 2 change is ``1 time'', which is the total of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation. In addition, even if the special pattern is stopped in a special mode when the jackpot is not won in the special drawing lottery, it will shift to the second time-saving gaming state (c time-saving) and the number of time-savings will be the special pattern 1 fluctuation and the special pattern. In total, ``1200 times'' and special figure 2 fluctuation ``1 time'' are given with the figure 2 fluctuation.

Here, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the passage gate 3126 is arranged in the right side area 3107, so when the transition is made to the time saving state b, the player plays the game with the right hand. . At this time, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126 and wins a general drawing lottery, and the normal electric accessory 3146 operates and captures the game ball, the game ball starts at the second starting port 3140 and enters the prize. I will do it. Therefore, the number of time saving times in the time saving state b is substantially one.

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, a special mode is included in the stopping modes of a plurality of types of special symbols that result in small wins. Here, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, there is no small hit in the special pattern 1 lottery, and there is a small win in the special pattern 2 lottery, so the combination of stopped symbols in the special pattern 1 fluctuation becomes a special pattern. There isn't. Therefore, the c time saving state can be shifted to the b time saving state. Even in the case of transitioning to the time saving state c, the player will proceed with the game by hitting the right hand, as in the time saving state b, and it will be easier to start and win at the second starting opening 3140, so the time saving in the time saving state c. The number of times is actually one. In this way, the number of time saving times in the second time saving game state in the fourth pachinko game machine is substantially "one time".

In the second time-saving game state, it is possible to start winning into the second starting port 3140, and most of the special drawing 2 drawings result in small winnings, so the small winning game is executed after the special drawing 2 fluctuation stops. be done. Furthermore, if the stop symbol of the small hit winning is in a special mode, the small winning game is executed by shifting to the second time saving game state (c time saving state). After the small winning game ends, if there is no special figure 2 pending, the second time saving game state ends. In addition, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if the stop symbol for winning a small hit is in a special mode, the small winning game is executed by shifting to the second time saving game state (c time saving state), but this is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, when some of the stop symbols that are a loss stop in a special manner, the second time saving game state (c time saving state) may be entered. In this case, the player cannot win a prize ball due to a small hit, but by controlling in this way, it is possible to continue or start the time saving while pretending that the time saving has ended.

In this way, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, on the condition that the special symbol lottery reaches 850 times in a low probability state, the small prize game shifts to the small prize RUSH in which the small prize game is likely to be executed continuously. do. The details of the small hit RUSH will be described later, but the small hit RUSH is a stop where there is no special pattern 2 pending when the special pattern 2 variation of one time saving is consumed, and the stop mode of the special pattern 2 of the final variation does not give a time saving. If it is a mode, in other words, if it is not a special mode, the process ends. When the small hit RUSH ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

Specifically, in the case of winning a regular game ball in the normal state, when the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128 and passes through the regular game starting opening 3220, a regular game lottery is held. If you win the general map, you will be transferred to the second bonus for 20 small wins. In the second bonus, you can expect to win 10 balls into the jackpot jackpot opening 3131 in one small winning game, so you can expect 3000 prize balls and 10 balls into the second starting opening 3140. Therefore, 300 prize balls will be added. In this way, a maximum of 3,300 prize balls can be expected in the second bonus. However, it is not always possible to win one prize by opening the jackpot jackpot 3131 once, or if the special pattern 1 variation is being executed when the general pattern is won, the special pattern 1 variation will not be played until the special pattern 1 variation stops. Since the variation in FIG. 2 cannot be started, the number of small hits may decrease, so it is not always possible to obtain a maximum of 3,300 prize balls. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, 1000 to 3300 prize balls can be expected in the second bonus. When the second bonus ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

[Small hit RUSH]
Next, the small hit RUSH will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, the player plays the game with the left hand in the normal state and enters the game ball into the center ball entry hole 3128, aiming for a special jackpot or a regular jackpot. Here, since the probability that a game ball that enters the central ball entry port 3128 will win a prize in the first starting port 3120A is 1/3, under normal conditions, it is difficult for the reservation of the special drawing 1 variation to be accumulated. There is. For this reason, there are many cases where there is no suspension of special figure 1 variation when the special figure variation reaches 850 times.

FIG. 95 shows a case where the special symbol variation reaches 850 times without reservation of the special symbol 1 variation and shifts to the second time saving gaming state (b time saving). ), the ball is hit to the right and the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126, thereby starting the normal pattern fluctuation. When the normal figure fluctuation stops in a winning manner, the normal electric accessory 3146 is activated. When the normal electric accessory 3146 is activated and the ordinary electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball (normal electric prize in FIG. 95), the second non-electric accessory 3441 is activated and becomes the open state, and the two game balls are activated. The second non-electric accessory 3441 closes due to the passage of the ball. The two game balls that passed through the second non-electric accessory 3441 enter the second starting port 3140 to start winning (special drawing 2 winning in Figure 95), special drawing 2 starts to fluctuate due to the previous starting winning, and the following Special drawing 2 changes due to starting winnings will be suspended. When the special figure 2 starts to fluctuate, the second time-saving game state ends and the winning probability of the special figure lottery shifts to a low probability state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, most of the small winnings are won, so the small winning game is executed (small winning operation and small winning operation end in FIG. 95).

If the stop mode of the special figure 2 that has won the small hit here is a special mode, the game shifts to the second time saving game state (c time saving state) after the small winning game ends. However, since the reserved special figure 2 fluctuation is started immediately, the second time-saving game state ends in a short time. For this reason, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 3126 during the second time-saving game state after the end of the small winning game until the start of the next special figure 2 variation, and the regular figure variation rarely starts. . Therefore, it is extremely difficult for the special figure 2 hold to increase during the second time-saving gaming state triggered by the previous special figure 2 starting winning. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the previous variation when there is a reserved special figure 2 variation is a variation that shifts to a time-saving state, whether or not the last special figure 2 variation is a variation that shifts to a time-shortened state. The end of RUSH is determined by In addition, regardless of whether or not the small hit stop mode of the special figure 2 variation triggered by the special figure 2 start winning after being suspended is a special mode, the small hit game is executed (the small hit in Figure 95 operation, small hit operation completed). In addition, if the small hit stop mode of the special drawing 2 due to the later starting winning is a special mode, the second time saving game state (c time saving state) is transferred after the small winning game ends.

In this case, since the special figure 2 is not held after the end of the small winning game, the special figure 2 variation does not start. In order to start the special figure 2 variation, it is necessary to win the regular figure lottery, so the player hits right and passes the game ball through the passage gate 3126 during the second time-saving game state. Start the general fluctuation. The normal figure fluctuation at this time will be started during the second time saving game state (c time saving state). When the normal figure variation stops in a winning manner, the normal electric accessory 3146 is activated, and when the ordinary electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is activated and becomes open, and the two game objects are activated. The second non-electric accessory 3441 closes due to the passage of the ball. The two game balls that have passed through the second non-electric accessory 3441 start and win a prize in the second starting opening 3140. Thereafter, two small winning games corresponding to the starting winnings of two game balls into the second starting opening 3140 are similarly executed. In this way, if the special figure 2 is stopped in a special manner due to the later starting winning, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state after the small winning game ends, and the state where it is easy to win the small winning is repeated. That is, the small hit RUSH continues.

FIG. 96 shows a case where the small hit RUSH ends, and while the stopping mode of the special drawing 2 due to the subsequent starting prize winning indicates the small winning winning, if it is not a special mode, it will not be shown in FIG. 96(a). As shown, after the small winning game ends, the small winning RUSH ends and the normal state returns.
In addition, if the stopping mode of the special drawing 2 due to the subsequent starting winning does not indicate a jackpot win or a small winning winning, and is not a special mode, as shown in FIG. 96(b), after the special drawing 2 stops, , the small hit RUSH ends and returns to the normal state.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of reservations for the special figure 2 variation is "1", but it may be greater than that. In this case, if the final change of special figure 2 is a small hit that does not give time saving and special figure 2 is not reserved, or if the final change of special figure 2 is not supposed to give time saving and special figure 2 is not reserved. In this case, the small hit RUSH ends.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special figure 2 changes to the normal state, it is during the second bonus, and in order to avoid shifting to c time saving during the second bonus, the special figure 2 changes in the normal state. The stopping symbols are determined so that the symbols do not stop in a special manner. On the other hand, the second time-saving game state includes a case where the small hit stop mode of the special drawing 2 is a special mode so that the small hit RUSH continues with a predetermined probability. In addition, it is possible to include the case where the special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 stop in a special pattern, but in order to lower the probability of shifting to c time saving during the second bonus, 2 It is desirable to increase the probability that a special mode will appear in the time-saving gaming state.

By the way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the time saving b starts, the special figure 1 remains on hold, and the special figure 1 variation is executed in the b time saving state, and during this variation of the special figure 1, the player moves to the right. Suppose that you hit the ball and start winning two game balls in the second starting port 3140. In this case, the special figure 2 variation is suspended by "1", the special figure 2 variation starts immediately after the special figure 1 stops, and the second time-saving gaming state (b time saving) ends, so the second time-saving gaming state ( The special figure 2 variation obtained by the player in b time saving) is held once.

Therefore, if there are any special drawings 1 pending when b time saving starts, you can eliminate the remaining special drawings 1 holdings and then switch to right-handed hitting to avoid two special drawings 2 fluctuations. becomes possible to obtain. However, if the remaining special figure 1 hold includes a jackpot, the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) of the special figure will be reset, so after the jackpot game state ends, it will not shift to the b time saving state, and the result will be As a result, there will be no transition to small hit RUSH.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 remains on hold at the time when b time saving starts, it becomes possible to allow the player to select a game strategy at the start of b time saving. For example, when the time saving b starts, there are 3 special map 1 reservations remaining, and when the special map 1 variation is performed and the number of special map 1 reservations is reduced to 2, the reservation ball notice with relatively high reliability If appears, the player can choose between a policy of simply using the special chart 1 and seeing the result, and a policy of hitting right and aiming for both the small hit RUSH and the special chart 1 jackpot.

Note that the number of fluctuations until the time saving b starts may be visually displayed to inform the player of the time saving start timing b. This makes it easy for the player to proceed with the game so that there is no special figure 1 pending at the start of b time saving.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned configuration, when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), the total number of time-saving changes of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is "1200 times" and the special figure 2 variation "1". By giving "times", the time saving number is essentially set to "1 time" for the special figure 2 variation, but it may be set as "1 time" by the sum of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation. As a result, if the special figure 1 is on hold when the number of operations reaches n, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) will end the next time the special figure 1 fluctuation starts, so the player , it becomes necessary to hit the right hand to start the general pattern fluctuation and obtain the special pattern 2 hold. In other words, in order to move to the small hit RUSH, when the number of activations reaches n, the b time saver is activated at the start of the variation of special figure 1, and during the variation, hit right and obtain special figure 2 reservation. There is a need. In this way, it is possible to provide players with a game that gives them a sense of urgency. In addition, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) may be ended if there is no special figure 2 pending at the time when the special figure variation that has reached the number of operations n stops. This makes it possible to give the player an even greater sense of urgency.

[5-6. Production screen]
97 to 100 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of production screens displayed on the display device 3007 in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 97 shows the performance screen from the normal state to the jackpot game state after winning a jackpot, and after the jackpot game state ends to the first time-saving game state. In the normal state, the game is played by left-handed hitting, and as mentioned above, the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is low (1/319.6). will be released. Normally, the electric accessory 3146 is opened for a period of time long enough to capture one game ball, and is performed 10 times at long intervals.

In addition, in the normal state, since the special figure 1 variation is performed by winning the first starting opening 3120A, the display device 3007 displays the special figure 1 identification symbol 3601 for production and the special symbol 2 identification symbol for production. 3602, a general pattern identification pattern 3603 for production, special pattern 1 reservation information 3611, special pattern 2 reservation information 3612, general pattern reservation information 3613, and various other information, performance images, etc. are displayed. The special figure 1 identification pattern 3601 for production is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the display device 3007 so that it can be easily recognized by the player. The general pattern identification pattern 3603 for performance is displayed below the special pattern 1 identification pattern 3601 for performance so that it can be easily recognized by the player. The special figure 1 reservation information 3611 and the special figure 2 reservation information 3612 correspond to the larger pending symbol corresponding to the currently changing special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 reserve information 3612, and the reserved special figure 1 variation. It consists of a smaller reserved symbol. The general figure reservation information 3613 indicates the number of pending general figure fluctuations in numbers.

In the normal state, the player hits the ball to the left, and the game ball enters the center ball entry port 3128 and passes through the first starting port 3120A and the regular ball starting port 3220, as shown in FIG. 97(a). If the first identification symbol 3601 for performance and the regular identification symbol 3603 for performance fluctuate, and the special drawing 1 lottery is a loss, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the first identification symbol for performance changes. 3601 is stopped and displayed in a missed state, and the larger pending symbol is erased. If the lottery result is a loss, the general pattern identification pattern 3603 for presentation is stopped and displayed in a losing manner, as shown in FIG. 97(c).

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the first identification symbol 3601 for production is stopped and displayed in a dislocated manner, the remaining smaller pending symbol slides and displays the larger one as shown in FIG. 97(c). It becomes a pending symbol, and the first identification symbol 3601 for performance starts to fluctuate based on the special figure 1 pending information 3611.

When the special drawing 1 lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 97(d), the first identification symbol 3601 for production is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, and the larger pending symbol is erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 97(e), an image notifying the transition to the jackpot gaming state (first bonus) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 97(f), an image encouraging right-handed play is displayed. An image notifying the number of rounds is displayed. In the jackpot game state, the game is advanced by hitting right. In addition, the normal figure variation is also performed in the jackpot game state. However, even if a regular symbol is won in the jackpot game state, the regular symbol winning game is not executed. In addition, in the jackpot game state, special figure 1 and special figure 2 variations are not executed.

FIG. 97(g) is an example of the display on the display device 3007 when the jackpot game state ends. For example, by displaying 160 times in probability variable mode, the probability of winning the special drawing lottery after the jackpot game state ends is increased. The game enters a probability state, and further suggests to the player that the game will move to a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) where the number of time-savings is 160. In the first time-saving game state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, and the probability of winning the regular drawing lottery is high.

FIG. 97(h) shows a display example of the display device 3007 in the variable probability mode. An image instructing you to hit will be displayed. In addition, when the first identification symbol 3601 for performance is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode in the variable probability mode, the display device 3007 displays the image shown in FIG. 97(e) and then displays a performance in a jackpot game state. When the 160 time saving times are used up in the variable probability mode, the display device 3007 returns to the image shown in FIG. 97(a) and displays an image instructing left-handed batting. The image instructing left-handed hitting is performed during one fluctuation from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the first identification symbol 3601 for performance. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, since the first time-saving game state ends when the first identification symbol 3601 for the 160th time-saving performance starts changing, for example, From the time when the first identification symbol 3601 starts to fluctuate to the time when it ends, an effect display such as "Please hit to the left" may be displayed to encourage the player to hit to the left.

FIG. 98 shows the performance screen from the normal state to the normal state after winning the general drawing lottery, and from the normal state to the normal state to the normal state. In the normal state, the player hits the ball to the left, and the game ball enters the center ball entry port 3128 and passes through the first starting port 3120A and the regular ball starting port 3220, as shown in FIG. 98(a). , the first identification pattern 3601 for presentation and the common pattern identification pattern 3603 for presentation fluctuate, and as shown in FIG. In this case, the player is notified that he or she has won the general drawing lottery, and as shown in FIG. bonus). At this time, an image instructing you to hit right is displayed. Then, when the player hits right, the game ball is captured by the normal electric accessory 3146, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is opened, and two game balls are started and won in the second starting opening 3140. Along with this, two pieces of special figure 2 pending information 3612 are displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 98(c), and the second identification symbol 3602 for production starts to fluctuate. Then, as shown in FIG. 98(d), when the second identification symbol 3602 for performance stops in a small hit mode, an image suggesting the number of small wins during the normal pattern winning game state, which is the first bonus, is displayed. do. From then on, as the number of small wins increases, the number of small wins displayed on the display device 3007 is updated, and when the fluctuation of the last second identification symbol 3602 in the normal pattern winning game state stops, as shown in FIG. 98(e) As shown, an image indicating the end of the normal game state (second bonus) called last is displayed. Then, when the winning game state (second bonus) ends, the game returns to the normal state production screen as shown in FIG. 98(f). At this time, an image indicating left-handed batting is displayed.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the maximum number of small wins in the normal pattern winning game state (second bonus) is 20, but the number of small wins is not necessarily 20. For example, the special drawing 2 lottery includes a loss, and in the case of a loss, the small win game will not be executed, so the number of small wins will be reduced by the number of losses. In addition, in the normal pattern winning game state (second bonus), all the special drawing 2 drawings may be made into small winnings, so that it is possible to always win the small winning number of 20 times. In addition, if the special pattern 1 variation is executed at the time of the regular pattern winning, even if you hit the right hand and get the special pattern 2 hold, the special pattern 2 variation will start until the special pattern 1 variation stops. Not done. For this reason, even if the normal winning game is being executed, the small winning game will not be executed until the special drawing 1 fluctuation stops, and the number of small winnings will be reduced accordingly. In addition, when the special pattern 1 variation is executed at the time of a regular pattern hit, and this special pattern 1 variation stops in a jackpot mode, the screen of the display device 3007 changes to the screen shown in FIG. 98(c). The screen is then switched to the one shown in FIG. 97(e), and a performance display in the jackpot game state is executed. Further, after the jackpot game state ends, a first time saving game state (a time saving) is executed. Here, since the special figure 2 variation is suspended at the start of the first time-saving gaming state, there is a high possibility that a small hit can be won by the special figure 2 variation. However, even if the small winning mode at this time is a special mode (for example, an odd number arrangement), c time saving does not operate, and a time saving state continues.

FIG. 99 shows the production screen before and after the transition to the second time saving game state (b time saving). Figure 99(a) shows the effect screen when the special figure changes for the 848th time, and Figure 99(b) shows the effect screen when the special figure changes for the 849th time. By displaying a countdown from the time when the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) before the specified number of transitions (850 times) is reached, the game can indicate that the transition to the second time saving gaming state (b time saving) is near. suggest to the person. Then, when the specified number of times (850 times) is reached, as shown in FIG. 99(c), at the same time as the special symbol fluctuation starts, as shown in FIG. In addition to displaying the right-handed batting instruction image. In addition, before reaching the specified number of times (850 times), it is in the normal state and it is difficult to start winning the second starting port 3140, so at the same time as the special drawing 1 fluctuation starts, as shown in FIG. 99(d) , "Small hit RUSH enters" is displayed, and then, when the special chart 1 fluctuation stops, as shown in Figure 99 (e), "Small hit RUSH starts" is displayed, and the special chart 2 fluctuation starts. At this point, as shown in FIG. 99(f), "RUSH 1st time" is displayed, and two pieces of special figure 2 reservation information 3612 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 99(g), the determination result based on the first special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is notified to the player by the stop mode of the second identification symbol 3602 for production, and then, As shown in h), the determination result based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is notified to the player by the stopping manner of the second identification symbol 3602 for production. Here, if the stop mode of the second identification symbol 3602 is an odd number, it is a small hit win, and after the small winning game ends, the second time saving game state (c time saving) is entered in which a time saving number of "1" is given. Transition. In this way, the stopping mode of the odd-numbered second identification symbols 3602 is an example of a special mode. If the second identification symbols 3602 are stopped in an even numbered manner, it is a small hit win, and the game state does not change after the small win game ends. Since the stopping mode of the second identification symbol 3602 for performance shown in FIG. 99(h) is a special mode, if the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained by saving time "once", the small hit RUSH can be continued. Therefore, "Continue" and an image suggesting that the small hit RUSH can be continued are displayed together.

If the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained during the display screen shown in FIG. 99(h), "RUSH 2nd time" is displayed as shown in FIG. 100(a), and two FIG. 2 reservation information 3612 are displayed. Is displayed. After that, the small hit RUSH continues because the stop mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 becomes a special mode. Figure 100 (b) shows the case where the small hit RUSH continues 10 times. This shows that. As shown in FIGS. 99(d) to 99(h), FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b), during the small hit RUSH, the image display of the right-hand hit instruction is continued. Here, after the special figure 2 starts to fluctuate in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), at the time when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) has ended and it is in the normal state. However, as shown in FIG. 99(g), the image display of the right-handed batting instruction continues.

If the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is not a special mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation is a special mode. In the case of a small win that is not, "End" is displayed at the same time as the special figure 2 variation stops, and after the small win game ends, the normal state performance screen is returned to, as shown in FIG. 100(d). At this time, an image indicating left-handed batting is displayed. The image instructing left-handed hitting is performed during one variation from the start to the end of the variation of the second identification symbol 3602.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 100(e), there are other cases where the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is not a special mode. There are cases where the stopping mode is not a special mode. In this case, "End" is displayed at the same time as the special figure 2 variation stops, and the display returns to the normal state production screen as shown in FIG. 100(d). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is not a special mode, a variation pattern with a long variation time of the special figure 2 is selected, From the time when the second identification symbol 3602 for performance starts to change to when it ends, a performance display such as "Please hit to the left" may be displayed to encourage the player to hit to the left.

[5-7. Effects of the fourth pachinko machine]
According to the fourth pachinko gaming machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fourth pachinko game machine, it is equipped with b time saving and c time saving, and when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures a game ball in the b time saving and c time saving states, it becomes an open state, and in the open state, two A second non-electric accessory 3441 that becomes closed when the game ball wins is provided in the second starting port 3140, and when the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation is a special mode, it is a small hit and once after the small win game. It is equipped with a function that saves time. As a result, one time reduction will be granted once the specified number of fluctuations have been exhausted and the time reduction will begin, and the player may be able to obtain two special symbol 2 fluctuations with this one time reduction. . There is a high possibility that you can win two small winning games with these two special figure 2 fluctuations, and if the second small winning mode is a special mode, one time saving will be given, so you can get two small winning games again. The possibility of winning a winning game increases. In this way, by performing the special figure fluctuation up to the specified number of times, it is possible to obtain a small hit RUSH, and if the second small hit mode is a special mode, the small hit RUSH will continue. It becomes possible to provide players with interesting game balls.

Also, during the small hit RUSH, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the game can be interrupted with the second non-electric accessory 3411 in the open state by stopping the firing of the game ball. I can do it. Then, hit right again, make the second non-electric accessory 3411 capture the game ball and start the special pattern 2 variation, and if the second special pattern 2 variation stops in a special manner, continue the small hit RUSH. be able to. By keeping the second non-electric accessory 3411 in the open state in this way, it becomes possible to interrupt the game even during the small win RUSH, and it becomes possible to take a restroom break.

In addition, during the small hit RUSH, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by one small winning game due to the special figure 2 fluctuation is 150, and by continuing one small winning RUSH, the player can receive 300 prize balls. is obtainable. Therefore, depending on the number of times the small hit RUSH is continued, it may be possible to obtain more prize balls than one first bonus or second bonus. In this way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, it is possible to improve the interest in the small win RUSH that is executed when the specified number of fluctuations is exhausted. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, a large amount of prize balls can be won by winning the special figure 1 lottery and moving to the jackpot game state, and in the second time-saving game state, most of the prize balls are small by winning the special figure 2 lottery. By winning a winning game and shifting to a small winning game state, prize balls can be won little by little. In this way, since the benefits given to the player are different in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state, it is possible to provide time-saving gaming states with mutually different gaming characteristics.

In addition, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, by winning the regular drawing lottery in the normal state, the second bonus allows you to expect a larger number of prize balls than the first bonus (jackpot game state due to one special drawing jackpot) to move to. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can arouse great interest in the general drawing lottery.

Although the fourth pachinko game machine according to the present invention has been described above, the fourth pachinko game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the interval time for each release of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to include the playing time due to small winnings, but it is not limited to this. In addition to the winnings, the settings may also include playing time based on jackpots. Specifically, by including a jackpot game in which the opening/closing operation of the small win game is performed for two or more rounds, and the jackpot game transitions to a normal state with low probability and no time saving after the jackpot game ends, the number of openings from the players will increase. It may also be possible to make it feel like it was. As a result, multiple jackpots can be treated as one jackpot based on one winning of a common symbol, and a performance can be continuously executed, and a large number of balls can be expected to be awarded at once.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, after the ball enters the central ball entrance 3128, a croon tray 3210 is provided that includes a special game 1 and a regular game start opening, and a special game 1 and a regular game are drawn at the same time in the normal state. However, the structure is not limited to this, and a croon including a special drawing 2, a normal electric accessory, a large winning opening, a general winning opening, an out opening, etc., or a combination thereof may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, it is possible to enter two balls into the second non-electric accessory 3411 for each winning (one opening) to the normal electric accessory 3146, and two balls to the second non-electric accessory 3411. Although it is assumed that the ball will be closed by entering the ball, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to enter one ball per winning (one opening) to the normal electric accessories 3146, and the ball will be closed by winning one ball. You may provide the first starting port 3121B or the second starting port 3140 with a non-electric accessory that causes a starting prize, or a combination thereof.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, if a jackpot is achieved during the opening of one set of normal electric accessories 3146 10 times, the state shifts to the jackpot game state regardless of the operating state of the ordinary electric accessories 3146. Alternatively, a configuration may be provided in which the opening operation continues. In this case, after the jackpot transition, the normal electric accessory 3146 and the second non-electric accessory 3411 are released in the same way as before the jackpot transition, but unlike before the jackpot transition, the second non-electric accessory 3411 enters the ball. The fluctuation and small hit operation by the second starting port 3140 may not be performed. In addition, the special symbol reservation based on the ball entering the normal electric accessory 3146 is not consumed during the jackpot, but after the jackpot ends. Further, in a pachinko game machine equipped with a non-electric accessory that supports winning, an electric accessory may be used instead of the non-electric accessory.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the time shortening ends at the same time as the start of the special symbol fluctuation, but this is not limited to a configuration in which the time shortening ends at the end of the fluctuation, at a specific timing during the fluctuation, etc. , a configuration combining them may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the small hit RUSH state is configured to go back and forth between a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state, and the time-saving state in which the special drawing 2 is changed is always a right-handed hit notification. , a specification that switches between right-handed hitting notification and left-handed hitting notification depending on the state, or a configuration that combines these may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, most of the results of the special drawing 2 lottery result in a small hit, and there is a low probability of a loss, and in the case of a small win or a loss that is not a special mode, the small win RUSH is terminated. After the jackpot game ends, including the jackpot that becomes 1 bonus, the small win RUSH may be ended by shifting to variable probability and a time saving.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the small hit stop mode due to special figure 2 variation includes a special mode that shifts to c time saving, but the miss stop mode due to special figure 2 variation shifts to c time saver. Special aspects may also be included.

[6. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called Type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi, and like the first pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are parallel to each other. This is a pachinko game machine that can be displayed variably.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 4184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, , signals output to the hall computer 4186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island, which have the same functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine. We will omit the explanation as much as possible.

In explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fifth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko game machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

In explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 101, the game board unit 4010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 4010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine. A game area 4105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 4010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 4105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 4120A, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 101, the game board unit 4010 mainly includes a game panel 4100 in which a game area 4105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow, a guide rail 4110, and approximately the center of the game area 4105. A center accessory 4115 arranged in the section, first starting ports 4120A, 4120B, general prize opening 4122, passage gate unit 4125, special electric accessory unit 4130, second starting port 4140, and normal electric accessory It includes an object unit 4145, an LED unit 4160, an outlet 4178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 4160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this fifth pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 4100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 4007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 4100, a guide rail 4110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 4110 toward the game area 4105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 4105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 4100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 4100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 4100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 4100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 4110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 4105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 4110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 4006 (see FIG. 102 described later) to the upper part of the game area 4105.

(center role)
The center accessory 4115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 4100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 4116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 4105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 4116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 4105 by the firing device 4006 flows down the left side area 4106 or the right side area 4107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 4106 or the right side area 4107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 4100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 4106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 4107.

In addition, the center accessory 4115 has a warp entrance 4117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 4106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 4117 is configured to be guided to a stage 4118 formed on the center accessory 4115. The stage 4118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 4007. Note that the stage 4118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 4119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 4118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and a game ball that enters the chance entrance 4119 is released directly above the first starting port 4120A. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 4119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 4117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 4117 but did not enter the chance entrance 4119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 4120A.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 4120A, it is detected by the first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 102, which will be described later). Further, a first starting hole 4120B is arranged in the right side area 4107 of the display device 4007, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize in the first starting hole 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting port 4120B, it is detected by the first starting port switch 4121B (see FIG. 102, which will be described later).

When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting ports 4120A, 4120B is detected by the first starting ports switches 4121A, 4121B (see FIG. 102 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B is not limited to this.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 4122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 4007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 4122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 4123 (see FIG. 102, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 4123 (see FIG. 102 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 4122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 4122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a right-handed game ball to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 4122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 4125 is arranged in the right side area 4107, and includes a passage gate 4126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 4126. 4127 (see FIG. 102 described later), it is arranged in the right side area 4107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through it. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 4126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 4125 is detected by the passage gate switch 4127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 4125 may be arranged in the left region 4106 instead of or in addition to the right region 4107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 4130 integrates a grand prize opening 4131, a count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 4131, and a special electric accessory 4133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 4125 in the right side area 4107.

The big prize opening 4131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 4131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 4115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning opening 4131 is a winning opening that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the grand prize opening 4131, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 4131 is not limited to 15.

The special electric accessory 4133 includes a special electric shutter 4134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 4135 that operates the special electric shutter 4134 (see FIG. 102 described later). The special electric accessory 4133, that is, the special electric shutter 4134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 4131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 4131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 4131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. state.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 4140 is arranged in the left side region 4106 (more specifically, below the first starting port 4120A). However, the second starting port 4140 is designed so that the game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second starting port 4140 by the game nail so that either a game ball hit to the left or a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is composed of However, it is not essential that the second starting port 4140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side area 4107, for example, so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 4140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 102, which will be described later). When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 102 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 4140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 4145 is arranged in the right side area 4107 (more specifically, directly below the passage gate 4126 and above the special electric accessory 4133), and when the game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of games can be won. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole from which balls are paid out as prize balls, a switch that detects winning of game balls into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 4146. In the fifth pachinko game machine, the winning opening is the second starting opening 4140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 4141.

The normal electric accessory 4146 includes a tongue-shaped general power movable member 4147 that can move forward and backward, and a general power solenoid 4148 (see FIG. 102 described later) that operates the general power movable member 4147. The normal electric accessory 4146, that is, the movable member 4147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 4140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 4140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. The open state is a state in which the general electricity movable member 4147 protrudes, and the game ball riding on the general electricity movable member 4147 moves to the second starting port 4140. The closed state is a state in which the movable member 4147 for normal electricity is retracted, and the game ball passes in front of the movable member 4147 for general electricity. In addition, instead of the general electric movable member 4147 called a so-called electric chew, a shutter rotatable in the front-back direction, for example, may be employed.

(Out port)
The out port 4178 is an output port 4178 that is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 4120, the second starting port 4140, the large winning port 4131, and the general winning port 4122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 4105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 4178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 4105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 4178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning holes 4122, to discharge game balls flowing down the gaming area 4105 to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 4010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 4100. This back unit includes a group of performance accessories 4058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 4007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 4300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 4058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 102 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the fifth pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 102, like the first pachinko game machine, the fifth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 4200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 4300, a payout/emission control circuit 4400, and a power supply circuit 4450.

[6-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 4200 includes a main CPU 4201, a main ROM 4202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 4203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 4204, a backup capacitor 4207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 4202, a main RAM 4203, an initial reset circuit 4204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 4201. The main CPU 4201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 4202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 4201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 4201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 4202.

The main RAM 4203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 4203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 4201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 4201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 4204 monitors the main CPU 4201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 4207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 4203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 4200 includes an I/O port 4205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 4206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 4300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 4200. For example, the main control circuit 4200 includes a normal symbol display section 4161, a normal symbol reserve display section 4162, a first special symbol display section 4163, a second special symbol display section 4164, a first special symbol reserve display section 4165, and a first special symbol display section 4165. 2 special symbol reservation display section 4166, general electric solenoid 4148, special electric solenoid 4135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, a performance display monitor 4170, an error notification monitor 4172, etc. are also connected to the main control circuit 4200. Main control circuit 4200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 4205.

The performance display monitor 4170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 4201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 4172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 4172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 4200 is also connected to first starting port switches 4121A, 4121B, second starting port switch 4141, passage gate switch 4127, count switch 4132, general winning port switch 4123, etc. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 4200 via I/O port 4205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 4200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 4186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 4184, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the setting key 4174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 4203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 4176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 4176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too. In addition, in this embodiment, the total value of the number of variations of the special figure 1 and the number of variations of the special figure 1 and the number of variations of the special figure 2 is outputted to the outside, but the number of variations of the special figure 2 is not outputted to the outside.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 4174 and backup clear switch 4176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 4174 and backup clear switch 4176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 4174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 4176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 are connected to the main control circuit 4200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 4400 or the power supply circuit 4450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 4174 or the backup clear switch 4176.

[6-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 4300 includes a sub CPU 4301, a program ROM 4302, a work RAM 4303, a display control circuit 4304, an audio control circuit 4305, an LED control circuit 4306, an accessory control circuit 4307, a command input port 4308, and the like. The sub control circuit 4300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 4200. Although not shown in FIG. 102, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 4300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 4302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the fifth pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 4301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 4301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 4302. In particular, the sub CPU 4301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 4200.

The work RAM 4303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 4301.

The display control circuit 4304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 4007. The display control circuit 4304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 4304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 4301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and presentation image data.

Then, the display control circuit 4304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 4007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 4007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 4007. In this way, the display control circuit 4304 can control the display device 4007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 4305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 4032. The audio control circuit 4305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 4032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 4301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 4032.

The LED control circuit 4306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 4046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 4306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 4307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 4058). The accessory control circuit 4307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 4307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 4301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 4301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 4308 is connected to command output port 4206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 4200.

The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 4400 includes a payout device 4082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 4006 for firing balls, a card unit 4180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 4400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 4200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 4082 and controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 4182 is connected to the card unit 4180. The ball rental operation panel 4182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 4180. The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 4180. Note that although the operation panel 4182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 4180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 4400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 4450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 4200, sub control circuit 4300, payout/launch control circuit 4400, etc.

A power switch 4095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 4450. The power switch 4095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 4200, sub-control circuit 4300, payout/shooting control circuit 4400, etc.).

[6-3. Basic specifications of the fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[Jackpot, small hit probability]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, there are almost no "misses" in both the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing, and the specifications are such that it is easy to win a small hit or a jackpot. For example, the probability of a jackpot determination in the first and second special symbol drawings is approximately 1/319 in a low probability state and approximately 1/99 in a high probability state. The probability of a small hit determination in the first and second special symbol drawings is approximately 317/319 in a low probability state and approximately 97/99 in a high probability state. Therefore, the probability that the first and second special symbol drawings will be unsuccessful is approximately 1/319 in the low probability state and approximately 1/99 in the high probability state.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the number of prize balls due to starting winnings in the first starting openings 4120A, 4120B and the second starting opening 4140 is 4, the number of winning balls due to winning in the big winning opening 4131 is 15, The number of prize balls won by entering the prize opening 4122 is 10, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 10 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the high-accuracy time-saving game state with a 100% probability. Both the probability variation number and the time saving number are 160, and when the time saving number of 160 times is exhausted, the normal state is returned.

In the jackpot game state, one round ends when 10 game balls enter the jackpot hole 4131 or when the jackpot hole 4131 remains open for about 30 seconds. In the small hit game state, the big prize opening 4131 is opened for a short time, but it is difficult to win a prize, and if you advance the game with left-handed hitting and win a small hit, even if you switch to right-handed hitting, the game ball will not win the big prize. It is closed before reaching the mouth 4131.

[Number of time savings]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, at least b time saving among the above-mentioned time saving a, b working time saving, and c working time saving is installed. When the number of special symbol fluctuations when the jackpot lottery is in a low probability state reaches the number of activations n (for example, 750 times), time saving b is activated.

[Special design variation pattern]
The special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern table. The special symbol variation pattern table includes a special symbol variation pattern table for low starts that is referenced in the normal gaming state, and a special symbol variation pattern table for high starts that is referenced in the time-saving gaming state. The special symbol variation pattern table for start and the variation pattern table of special symbol for high start include tables for first special symbol and second special symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starts, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation of, for example, 580 to 600 seconds, regardless of the result of the special symbol 2 lottery, and the It is set significantly longer than the variation time of one special symbol (for example, 95 seconds at the longest). When the special drawing 1 lottery is a small hit or a deviation, a variation pattern of about 1 second is selected in most cases (for example, 90%).

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 lottery is a small hit or a miss is set longer than the special symbol fluctuation time when the result is a big hit. There is. For example, the special symbol fluctuation time in the case of a small hit or miss is set to 1 second, and the special symbol fluctuation time in the case of a jackpot is set to 0.5 seconds.

[6-4. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 of the main control circuit 4200 related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. The various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 are common to the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 related to the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39. Although it involves a lot of processing, it differs in the following points.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in the game state management process of the first pachinko game machine shown in S111 of FIG. 21, when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches the number of activations n, time saving b is activated. A process is added to turn on the b time saving flag indicating that the

Further, the fifth pachinko gaming machine executes the processing performed in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. 21. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a jackpot, the special electric accessory 1133 is driven to open the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in the case of a small win, the small win solenoid 1154 is driven. However, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 4201 drives the special electric accessories 4133 to open the large winning opening 4131 for a jackpot in both cases of a jackpot and a small winning. Performs control to open the .

In the fifth pachinko game machine, other processes executed by the main CPU 4201 are the same as in the first pachinko game machine. Therefore, descriptions of other processes executed by the main CPU 4201 will be omitted.

[6-5. Sub control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 will be explained. The various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 execute the various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 related to the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIG. In particular, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the command analysis process shown in FIG. 103 is executed.

(Command analysis processing)
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in S323 of FIG. 40 will be explained using FIGS. 103 and 104.

In S4110, processing is performed to determine whether a command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 determines whether the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it is determined that there is a received command, the process moves to S4120, and the sub CPU 4301 determines that there is a received command. If not, this subroutine ends.

In S4120, a process is performed to determine whether the received command is a special symbol game end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 4301 determines that it is a special symbol game end command, it moves the process to S4130, and if it does not determine that it is a special symbol game end command, it moves the process to S4140.

In S4130, the sub CPU 4301 performs the process when receiving the special symbol game end command shown in FIG.
In S4140, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing according to the received command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the process when receiving the special symbol game end command, first, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process to determine whether or not it is in a variable probability state (S4210). If it is determined that the state is in a variable probability state, the process moves to S4260. If it is not determined that the state is in a variable probability state, the process moves to S4220.

In S4220, processing is performed to update the low-precision special symbol variation counter. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of adding "1" to the value in a predetermined area of the work RAM 4303, which functions as a low-precision special symbol variation counter. That is, the value of the low-probability special figure variation counter is updated when the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation stop. When this process is completed, the process moves to S4230.

In S4230, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing to determine whether or not the game of special drawing 1 has ended. If it is determined that the game of special figure 1 has ended, the process moves to S4240. If it is not determined that the game of special figure 1 has ended, the process moves to S4250.

In S4240, processing is performed to update the low-accuracy special map 1 fluctuation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of adding "1" to the value in a predetermined area of the work RAM 4303, which functions as a low-accuracy special figure 1 variation number counter. That is, the value of the low-probability special figure variation counter is updated when the special figure 1 variation stops, and is not updated when the special figure 2 variation stops. When this process is completed, the process moves to S4250.

In S4250, processing is performed to set a variation count display effect and a ceiling suggestion effect. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of setting the value of the low-precision special figure 1 fluctuation number counter to be displayed on the display device 4007. In addition, the sub CPU 4301 provides a ceiling suggestion that indicates how far it is until entering the time saving b, depending on the difference between the number of operations n (for example, 750 times) to enter the time saving b and the value of the low-precision special symbol variation counter. Performs processing to set the performance. For example, a star mark is displayed on the display device 4007 as a ceiling suggestion effect, and if the difference number is 750 to 551, it is white, if it is 550 to 351, it is blue, if it is 350 to 151, it is yellow, if it is 150 to 51, it is purple. , 50 to 11 is red, and 10 to 1 is rainbow colored, and so on. When this process is completed, the process moves to S4260.

In S4260, the sub CPU 4301 performs other processes to be executed when receiving the special symbol game end command. For example, in the case of a jackpot, a process is performed to reset the low-probability special figure variation count counter and the low-probability special figure 1 variation count counter. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[6-6. Production screen]
FIGS. 105 and 106 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of production screens displayed on the display device 4007 in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 105(a) shows an example of a production screen displayed on the display device 4007 in a normal state. , fluctuation number information 4621 that informs the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 in a low probability state (non-probable variable state), suggestion information 4622 that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction is reached, and various production images including. Is displayed. In the normal state, it is possible to win to the first starting port 4120A and the second starting port 4140, so the special symbol 1 variation or the special symbol 2 variation is possible in the first special symbol display section 4163 or the second special symbol display section 4164. will be held. On the other hand, on the display device 4007, a special symbol 1 identification symbol 4601 for production corresponding to the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display section 4163 is displayed, but it is displayed by the second special symbol display section 4164. The special symbol for performance and the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol to be displayed are not displayed.

The special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the display device 4007 so that it can be easily recognized by the player. The special figure 1 reservation information 4611 consists of a larger pending symbol corresponding to the currently changing special symbol 1 variation and a smaller pending symbol corresponding to the reserved special symbol 1 variation.

The variation number information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 are images of the variation number display effect and the ceiling suggestion effect, which are set in the process shown in S4250 of FIG. 104. In FIG. 105(a), the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production is changing, and by visually recognizing the number of changes information 4621, it can be seen that the special figure 1 change has been performed 600 times. Further, since the color of the star which is the suggestion information 4622 is purple, it can be seen that the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction is reached is 150 to 51.

In this way, in the normal state, the display device 4007 displays an effect related to the special drawing 1, and information regarding the special drawing 2 lottery is hidden.

By the way, in the normal state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 is in the process of changing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stops. In addition, since most of the lottery results for special map 1 and special map 2 are small wins, the fluctuation of special map 1 stops and becomes a small hit, so even if the fluctuation of special map 2 is a jackpot, Forced to stop in a deviated manner. On the contrary, if the special figure 1 is fluctuating at the time when the special figure 2 variation stops in a small hit mode, the variation of the special figure 1 is forcibly stopped in a miss mode. For this reason, if there are both special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 pending, after special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 stop, fluctuations will start at the same timing, and special drawing 1 fluctuation will stop first. Most of the time.

In other words, when the variation of special figure 1 stops, the variation of special figure 2 is forcibly stopped in a missed manner. The value of the figure variation number counter will be increased by "2", and in the process of updating the low probability special figure 1 variation number counter shown in S4240, the value of the low probability special figure 1 variation number counter will be increased by "1". The number of variations information 4621 notified to the player is the value of the low probability special figure 1 variation counter, so the number of variations in the special figure 1 in the actual low probability state (non-probability variation state) (the number of variations in the special figure 1 and the number of variations in the special figure 1) 2) will be lower than the sum of the number of fluctuations).

In the state shown in FIG. 105(a), it is assumed that the special figure 2 variation has been performed 99 times. In this case, when the special figure 1 identification symbol 4601 for production that is fluctuating stops due to a small hit or miss, the fluctuation number information 4621 is updated to "601" as shown in FIG. 105(b), and the suggestion information 4622 is Switch to red. As the player repeats the number of special symbol fluctuations, the color of the star, which is the suggestion information 4622, changes to a rainbow color, as shown in FIG. 105(c), and the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction is reached. It is reported that there is only a small amount of Then, as the player repeats the special symbol fluctuation several times, as shown in FIG. 105(d), a message indicating that time saving b has been activated is displayed, indicating that "ceiling mode has started", and " A display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the game state is switched at the start of the special pattern variation, so after the 750th special pattern variation ends, at the start of the next special pattern variation, "ceiling mode start" and " "Right-handed hitter" is displayed.

FIG. 105(e) shows an example of a production screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the b time saving state (ceiling mode). A special figure 2 identification pattern 4602, special figure 1 reservation information 4611, special figure 2 reservation information 4612, and various production images are displayed. b In the time saving state (ceiling mode), it is possible to win in the first starting port 4120A and the second starting port 4140, and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display section 4163 is displayed on the display device 4007. A special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for effect corresponding to the effect and a special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for effect corresponding to the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display section 4164 are displayed. Note that in the b-time saving state (ceiling mode), the variation number information 4621 and suggestion information 4622 that were displayed in the normal state are not displayed.

By the way, in the b time saving state (ceiling mode), the special pattern fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) when the result of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 lottery is a small hit or a loss is the same as the special pattern fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) when it is a jackpot. 0.5 seconds). Therefore, if the special pattern 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation and the special pattern 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation start changing at the same time, the fluctuation of the jackpot will stop first, and the fluctuation that will become a jackpot due to a small hit will be missed. The number of forced stops in certain situations is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 105(e), the special pattern 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation and the special pattern 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation fluctuate simultaneously, and when one of the fluctuations stops due to a small hit, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), when one variation stops at a small hit, the other variation stops at a miss. A special pattern 1 identification pattern 4601 for performance and a special pattern 2 identification pattern 4602 for performance fluctuate at the same time, and when one of the fluctuations hits the jackpot and stops first, the other fluctuation stops immediately after in a miss manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the special pattern 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation stops in a jackpot mode, the special pattern 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation stops immediately or at the same time in a miss pattern. . Then, as shown in FIG. 106(b), after the jackpot is announced, the state shifts to the jackpot game state. In the fifth pachinko game machine, after the end of the jackpot game state, it shifts to a highly accurate time-saving game state (variable probability state and a time-saving game state) in which the number of time savings is 160 times. When the 160 time saving times are exhausted, the state shifts to the normal state.

FIGS. 106(c) and 106(d) show an example of a performance screen displayed on the display device 4007 in a high-accuracy time-saving game state where the number of time-savings is 160. Various production images including a special figure 1 identification symbol 4601, a special symbol 2 identification symbol for production 4602, special symbol 1 reservation information 4611, special symbol 2 reservation information 4612 are displayed. FIG. 106(e) shows an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the next special figure variation after the 160 time saving times have been exhausted and the high-accuracy time saving game state has ended. The FIG. 2 identification symbol 4602 and the special figure 2 reservation information 4612 are erased, and the fluctuation number information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 are displayed. At this time, the variation number information 4621 is "0". Then, after the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production fluctuates and stops and a small hit or miss is notified, the fluctuation number information 4621 becomes "1" as shown in FIG. 106(f). From then on, the game is executed in the normal state.

In addition, when both special symbols 1 and 2 become jackpot fluctuations, the special symbol that is given priority in the processing order on the program is stopped as a jackpot regardless of the fluctuation time, and the other special symbol is stopped as a result of a loss. When both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have a small hit and are stopped fluctuating at the same time, the special figure which has priority in the processing order on the program is stopped by a small hit, and the other special figure is stopped due to a miss.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fifth pachinko gaming machine, after the jackpot game state ends, it shifts to a high-accuracy time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 160, but the number of time-savings is 210, and the high-precision time-saving game state is not limited to this. The probability state (variable probability state) is set as a low probability state (variable probability state) from the 161st to the 210th time. Furthermore, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state from the 161st to the 210th time, the loss/small hit fluctuation time is longer than the jackpot fluctuation time for both special drawing 1 and special drawing 2. For example, assume that the loss/small win fluctuation time is 1 second, and the jackpot fluctuation time is 60 seconds. As a result, when one of the special figures 1 and 2 changes and comes to a small hit and stops, the other one misses and stops, and when either one hits the jackpot, it misses and stops. In other words, by creating a time-saving gaming state in which the jackpot is not won 50 times, it becomes possible to earn the number of special symbol fluctuations in a short time until the time-saving entry begins. The above-mentioned time-saving gaming state is the a-time-saving state, but it includes a special mode in which it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state (c-time-saving state) in the small winning or losing stop mode, and the above-mentioned winning is not done a predetermined number of times in the c-time-saving state. A time-saving game may be executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to further increase the number of special symbol fluctuations in a short period of time until the b time-saving entry begins.

Further, the number of times of time saving in a time saving and c time saving may be determined by random number lottery from among a plurality of times. For example, the number of time reductions for a time reduction may be determined to be one from 160 times, 210 times, and 909 times (160 times + 749 times). If you select 909 times, after the 160 high-accuracy time-saving game state is over, you will be in the 749 time-saving game state where you do not win the jackpot, and you will repeat the special symbol fluctuations while suppressing the consumption of the balls you have, so in effect After the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state ends, it is guaranteed that the game will shift to b-time saving in a short time.

[6-7. Effects of the fifth pachinko game machine]
According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fifth pachinko game machine, it is possible to change the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time, and in the effect display by the display device 4007 in the low probability state before reaching b time reduction, the effect of the change of the special figure 1 is displayed. By displaying the special figure 1 variation number and not displaying the effect display of the special figure 2 variation and the number of variation of the special figure 2 variation, a difference is created between the actual number of special figure variation and the number of variation displayed as an effect, and the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of fluctuations (ceiling number) until b time reduction is reached. This makes it possible for the player to feel that the time it takes to reach b time reduction is short.

In addition, the results of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings are mostly jackpots or small wins, with very few misses, and since special drawing 2 has a long fluctuation in normal conditions, when special drawing 2 is fluctuating, Special figure 1 often stops, and special figure 2 is forcibly stopped in a dislocated manner due to the stoppage of special figure 1. At this time, the number of variations in special figure 1 and the number of variations in special figure 2 increase at the same time, but the number of variations in special figure 1 is displayed as an effect, and the number of variations in special figure 2 is not displayed as an effect. This makes it possible to differentiate between the actual number of variations in the special figure and the number of variations displayed as an effect, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of variations (ceiling number) until reaching b time reduction.

In addition, it is equipped with a time saver and c time saver, and during the time saver, both the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are set so that the variation time of the jackpot is significantly longer than the variation time of the small hit or miss. For this reason, when either the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation stops hitting a small hit, even if the other one hits a jackpot, the other one misses and stops. Moreover, since the fluctuation time of a small hit or a miss is relatively short, a time-saving state in which it is difficult to get a big hit is executed a predetermined number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to repeat the special symbol fluctuations a predetermined number of times in a short period of time, and as a result, it becomes possible to earn the number of fluctuations (ceiling number) until reaching b time saving, so it is possible for the player to reach b time saving. can make the time feel shorter.

In addition, when entering b time saving, the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the small hit or miss. Therefore, when the result of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot becomes easier to stop the special drawing first, so that it becomes possible to shift to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of a jackpot is set to a short time of, for example, 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of a small hit or a loss is set to a short time of, for example, 1 second, the special drawing lottery is quickly completed after the start of b time saving.

Although the fifth pachinko game machine has been described above, it is also possible to partially change the fifth pachinko game machine described above. For example, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the first starting port 4120A and the second starting port 4140 are arranged separately, but the so-called navel winning game ball is placed between the first starting port 4120A and the second starting port 4120A. A mechanism may be provided for alternately entering the ball into the second starting port 4140. This increases the chance that special map 1 and special map 2 will fluctuate at the same time in the normal state, so after special map 2 stops at the same time as special map 1, special map 1 and special map 2 will change at the same time. There are more opportunities to start it, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is often forced to stop in a missed manner. As a result, it becomes possible to differentiate between the actual number of variations in the special figure and the number of variations displayed as an effect, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of variations (ceiling number) until reaching b time reduction.

Further, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the game ball that won the normal electric accessory 4146 enters the first starting port 4120B, but the game ball that won the normal electric accessory 4146 enters the first starting port 4120B. Prizes may be distributed to the opening and the second starting opening, respectively. As a result, when there is a small hit or a miss, there are many opportunities for special symbols 1 and 2 to stop at the same time, and then for special symbols 1 and 2 to start changing at the same time, resulting in a time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to quickly digest the number of time reductions in . As a result, it becomes possible to increase the number of fluctuations (ceiling number) until reaching the time saving b, making it possible for the player to feel that the time it takes to reach the time saving b is shorter. Note that it is also possible to apply the starting winning accessory unit 3150 installed in the fourth pachinko game machine. In this case, by changing the distribution of the time when the sorting device is turned on and off during the time when the electric accessory is normally in the open state, the frequency of winnings to the first starting port and the second starting port can be changed. becomes possible. For example, if the time when the sorting device is turned on and the time when it is turned off is the same, the number of special drawings 1 and 2 held increases in the same way, and the time that the sorting device is turned on is shorter. If the off time is long, the number of special symbols 1 on hold is likely to increase, and the number of special symbols 2 on hold is difficult to increase. In this way, it is possible to adjust the increase in the number of variations of the special figure 2 that is not displayed on the display device 4007 during the time saving. Note that, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the number of operations n does not include the number of fluctuations in the high probability state (variable probability state), but this does not preclude inclusion. Specifically, after changing the time in the high probability time saving state 160 times, changing it 590 times in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), and when the total reaches 750 times, the ceiling time saving (b time saving) is activated. You can.

[6-8. Fifth modification of pachinko gaming machine]
Hereinafter, a modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[6-8-1. Modification example 1]
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of Modification 1 of the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit of Modification 1 is the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101, in which the second starting port 4140 located directly below the first starting port 4120A is deleted, and a game ball that has won a normal electric accessory 4146 is used. is configured to pass through the second starting port 4140.

[Specifications of modification 1]
Modified example 1 is a time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state) or a non-probability variable state (low probability state), on the condition that the special symbol variation has been used a specified number of times. (b) Time saving. In modification example 1, the time saving game state (b time saving) is entered on the condition that the special figure variation has been consumed 100 times. In this time saving game state (b time saving), for example, 60 time saving times are given.

When a jackpot is won in a special drawing 1 lottery in a low probability state, the state shifts to a jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to a highly accurate non-time-saving game state (latent probability variation) in most cases. In the special drawing 1 lottery in the high probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the low probability state, but in most cases the game shifts to a high probability non-time saving gaming state (latent probability variable). In addition, in the special drawing 1 lottery in a high probability state, the player wins a small hit with a high probability. The high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability change) continues until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

When a jackpot is won in a special drawing 2 lottery in a low probability state, a transition is made to a jackpot game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and after the jackpot game state ends, a transition is made to a high-accuracy time-saving game state. This high-accuracy time-saving gaming state ends when, for example, the special symbol variation is exhausted 160 times.

[Transition of gaming state in modification example 1]
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in Modification 1. In the normal game state, the game is played by left-handed hitting. When you win the first hit, that is, when you win one special figure jackpot in the normal gaming state, after the jackpot game ends, in most cases, you shift to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation). In the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (latency-accuracy variation), the game is advanced by hitting to the left. If a special figure 1 jackpot is won in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation), after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation). At this time, the count value of the number of special symbol variations until reaching b time saving is reset. If the special symbol 1 small hit is won in the high probability non-time saving gaming state (latent probability change), the state shifts to the small winning gaming state. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability change), if you win a special drawing 1 jackpot or small hit, switch to right-handed hitting, let the game ball pass through the big winning opening 4131, and after the jackpot game or small hit game ends. , switch to left-handed batting. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation), it is easy to win a small hit, so it is in the so-called small-hit RUSH state, but in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation), the number of game balls does not increase. (Base value is about 95) A small hit probability is set. In addition, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation), the special symbol 1 fluctuation is mainly used as a left-handed extinguishment, but it may be mainly a special symbol 2 fluctuation as a right-handed extinguishment. Further, the special drawing 1 lottery may have no small winnings, and the special drawing 2 drawing may have a high probability of winning the small winnings.

When the count value of the number of special symbol fluctuations in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state reaches 100, the game shifts to the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state and b-time saving is activated. In Modification 1, 60 time saving times are given, but this is not the case. In the b-time saver state, the game is advanced by hitting the right hand, and when the b time saver is activated, an image that urges the player to play right-hand, such as "Right-hand hit", is displayed on the display device 4007. b When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the player shifts to a jackpot game state, acquires many prize balls, and then shifts to a high-accuracy time-saving game state. b When the 60 time saving times are exhausted in the time saving state, the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in a high-accuracy time-saving game state, the game shifts to a jackpot game state and after winning many prize balls, shifts to a high-accuracy time-saving game state. When the 160 time-saving times are exhausted in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state.

That is, according to the first modification, how quickly can the 100 times of time saving be used up in the high probability non-time saving gaming state (latency probability variation) to shift to the time saving gaming state (b working time saving) and the time saving gaming state (b working time saving) and The key to winning a large amount of prize balls is to win the jackpot. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine in which the game is made more interesting by shifting from a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to a low-precision time-saving gaming state (b-time saving).

[6-8-2. Modification 2]
Next, a second modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. The game board unit of Modification 2 is the same as the game board unit 4010 of Modification 1 shown in FIG. 107, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 2]
In modification 2, the jackpot probability of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 lotteries is the same, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. When a jackpot is won in the special drawings 1 and 2 lottery, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) and a first time saving game state (a time saving). Specifically, the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the number of probability changes and the number of time-savings are 160, and when the 160 times are exhausted, the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In addition, modification 2 is equipped with a b-time saving function, and the number of time-savings given when b-time saving is entered ( The number of time saving times N) is set to be large. Specifically, the number of operations n is 750 times, and the number of time saving times N is 800. In addition, the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of time saving consumed in the first time saving game state (a time saving).

[Transition of gaming state in modification 2]
FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in Modification 2. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a highly accurate time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 160 times. In the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the game is advanced by right-handed hitting, and the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in the normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a highly accurate time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 160 times. In the high-accuracy time-saving game state, when the number of time-savings 160 times is exhausted, the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the normal game state, on the condition that the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 750 times, a transition is made to a second time-saving game state (b time-saving) of a low-probability time-saving game state, and a time-saving number of 800 times is given. In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the game is advanced by hitting right, and the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in a second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a first time-saving game state (high-accuracy time-saving game state) in which the number of time-savings is 160 times. In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), if the special symbol variation is consumed 750 times without hitting the special symbol 2 jackpot, the number of time-savings 800 times is given. Furthermore, after the start of the second time saving game state (b time saving), the special symbol variation has been consumed 1500 times, and when the remaining time saving number is 100, an additional time saving number of 800 times is added.

In this way, according to the second modification, when moving to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the number of time-savings is added every time the special symbol fluctuation is used up 750 times, so it is essentially a jackpot. The second time-saving gaming state will continue until the player wins. As a result, even if the player falls into a so-called hooked state where he is unable to win a jackpot for a long time after moving to the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), the player can continue playing while reducing the consumption of the balls he has. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the modification 2, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a case may be included in which the state shifts to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latency probability variation) after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability of transitioning to the high probability non-time saving gaming state (latency probability variation) may be made higher than that of shifting to other gaming states (first time saving gaming state or normal state).

[6-8-3. Modification 3]
Next, a third modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. The game board unit of Modification 3 is similar to the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 107, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 3]
In modification 3, the jackpot probability of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings is the same, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. When a jackpot is won in the special drawings 1 and 2 lottery, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) and a first time saving game state (a time saving).

Specifically, in the case of a first win, that is, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, the game shifts to a variable probability state where the number of probability variations is 10 and a first time saving game state (a time saving) where the number of time saving times is 746. In the case of a jackpot during time saving, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a probability variable state where the number of probability changes is 10 times and a first time saving game state (a time saving) where the number of time saving times is 10 times. After the end of the jackpot game, if the 10 special symbol fluctuations are exhausted, the game shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, modification 3 is equipped with a time-saving function b, and the number of special symbol changes (number of operations n) necessary for the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) to operate is as follows: It is set larger than the number of time savings granted. Specifically, the number of times of operation n is 750 times, and the number of time saving times N can be set as appropriate, but is set to 100 times, for example. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, 10,000 time-saving times are given. In addition, the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of time saving consumed in the first time saving game state (a time saving).

[Transition of gaming state in modification 3]
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of Modification 3. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state (first win), after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a first time-saving game state in which the number of probability changes is 10 and the number of time-savings is 746. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in the time saving game state (a working time saving or b working time saving), after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a first time saving gaming state in which the number of probability changes is 10 times and the number of time saving times is 10 times.

After the first hit, when the 746 time-saving special symbol fluctuations have been exhausted, if there is a special symbol 2 pending, and if you win a jackpot with this special symbol 2 pending, you will enter the jackpot gaming state and win the jackpot. After the gaming state ends, the game shifts to a variable rate state where the number of variable rate changes is 10 and a first time saving game state where the number of time saving units is 10,000 times. If the jackpot is not won due to the special drawing 2 pending, the game shifts to a second time saving game state (b time saving) on the condition that the number of changes in the special drawing reaches 750 times. After the first hit, if there are 4 special symbols 2 pending at the time when the 746 time-saving special symbol fluctuations are completed, after the 4 special symbols 2 pending are consumed without winning the jackpot, the second time-saving gaming state will occur. Move to (b time saving). When the number of special drawing 2 reservations is 3 or less, the state is temporarily shifted to a normal game state after the special drawing 2 reservation is exhausted without winning a jackpot. Then, after the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed 1 to 3 times by left-handed hitting, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving).
In modification example 3, even if the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state when the 746 times of time-saving special symbol fluctuations have been completed, if there are 4 special symbols 2 on hold at that time, an effect image that encourages left-handed hitting is displayed. is not displayed on the display device 4007. If there are three or less special figures 2 on hold, an effect image encouraging left-handed hitting is displayed on the display device 4007. Then, after shifting to the second time saving game state (time saving b), an effect image encouraging right-handed hitting is displayed on the display device 4007.

After hitting the jackpot during time saving, when the 10 time saving number of special symbol fluctuations are exhausted, if there is a special symbol 2 pending, and if you win a jackpot with this special symbol 2 pending, you will move to the jackpot gaming state. After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a variable probability state where the number of probability variations is 10 and a first time saving game state where the number of time savings is 10000 times. If the jackpot is not won due to the special drawing 2 pending, the game shifts to a second time saving game state (b time saving) on the condition that the number of changes in the special drawing reaches 750 times. It should be noted that even after the jackpot during the time saving, an effect image urging the player to hit left or right depending on the number of special symbols 2 reserved is displayed on the display device 4007 in the same way as after the first hit.

In addition, in the modification 3, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a case may be included in which the state shifts to a high probability non-time saving gaming state (latency probability variation) after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability of transitioning to the high probability non-time saving gaming state (latency probability variation) may be higher than the probability of shifting to other gaming states (first time saving gaming state or normal state).

Further, the above-mentioned modification 3 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine like the third pachinko game machine. In the above-mentioned type 1 type 2 pachinko gaming machine, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state, you will be given 10,000 time saving times, but it is called a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In this pachinko game machine, when a small win is won in a special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, it is made easier to win a V prize. Specifically, it is assumed that the special electric accessory 4133 of the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 107 is provided with a V winning opening and a V shutter like the V winning device included in the third pachinko gaming machine. . Here, in the 1st type 2 pachinko game machine, even if you hit a small hit during the time saving, the normal electric accessory 4146 captures the game ball on the upstream side, so it is difficult for the game ball to move toward the special electric accessory 4133. . Therefore, a long variation may be provided as a variation pattern of the normal symbol, and at the time of the long variation, the normal electric accessory 4146 does not operate and the game ball may go to the special electric accessory 4133 located downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 4146. .

[6-8-4. Modification example 4]
Next, a fourth modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of modification 4. The game board unit of modification 4 is the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101, in which the second starting port 4140 located directly below the first starting port 4120A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. A second starting port 4140B is provided on the downstream side of the object 4133, and furthermore, a game ball won in the normal electric accessory 4146 is configured to pass through the second starting port 4140A. The game balls that have passed through the second starting port 4140A and the second starting port 4140B are detected by the second starting port switch 4141. Game nails are arranged around the second starting port 4140B on the board surface so that one ball wins out of the few game balls that do not win the special electric accessory 4133. The rest of the configuration of the game board unit of Modification 4 is the same as the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 4]
In modification 3, the jackpots from the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings include a probability-variable jackpot and a normal jackpot. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) and a high probability time saving gaming state (a time saving), which is a first time saving gaming state (a time saving). In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) in which the game is in a low probability state (non-probability variable state) and no time saving is given. The jackpot probability is set to, for example, 1/300 at a low probability and 1/150 at a high probability for both the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings, and the proportion of jackpots being variable jackpots is, for example, 50%. In addition, there is no small win in the special drawing 1 lottery, and there is a high probability of winning the small winning in the special drawing 2 drawing. In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the number of probability variations is 750, and the number of time-savings is 700.
In addition, Modification 3 is equipped with the b time saving function, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (operation number n) which is the condition for the b time saving to operate is 750 times. The number of time savings in the second time saving game state (b time saving) is 1000 times. In addition, the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of time saving consumed in the first time saving game state (a time saving).

[Transition of gaming state in modification 4]
FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in Modification 4. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed. If you win a special figure 1 jackpot in the normal game state, and if it is a probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, you will be in a high probability state with a probability variable number of 750 times and a high probability time saving game state of the first time saving game state with a time saving number of 700 times. to move to. If it is a normal jackpot, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. If a jackpot is won during the probability variation number of 750 times, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state based on the jackpot stop pattern.

In the high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting the right hand, and as the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126, the normal pattern fluctuations are performed in a short time, and most of them result in small hits. Become. Here, during the execution of the small winning game, the normal electric accessory 4146 captures the game ball on the upstream side of the special electric accessory 4133, so in the small winning game state, the prize ball due to winning in the large winning opening 4131 The specifications make it difficult to obtain.

After the end of the jackpot game state, when the 700 time-saving times are exhausted, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state shifts to a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. To obtain a small hit with high probability by continuing to play right-handed even when shifting to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and by placing a game ball in a second starting opening 4140B during the remaining 50 probability variations. I can do it. At this time, the transition is from the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) to the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has switched to a long fluctuation, so the normal electric accessory 4146 captures it during this long fluctuation. The game ball that passes without being played will now head towards the special electric accessory 4133, and it will be possible to win a prize into the big prize opening 4131. Therefore, during the remaining 50 variable probability games, it becomes a so-called small win RUSH in which it is possible to win a small win with a high probability and obtain a prize ball through the small win game. When a special figure 2 jackpot occurs during a small win RUSH, the system shifts to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to a high-accuracy time-saving game state or a normal game state based on a jackpot stop pattern. In addition, when the special figure 2 jackpot occurs during the small win RUSH, the jackpot game may be executed not only after the small win RUSH ends.

Then, when the remaining 50 variable times are used up, the game shifts to a second time saving game state (b time saving) in which the number of time saving times is 1000 times. When a jackpot is achieved in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high-accuracy time-saving game state or a normal game state based on the jackpot stop symbol. When the 1000 time saving times are exhausted, the second time saving game state (b time saving) is transferred to the normal game state.

According to the fourth modified example configured in this way, even if the state continues where it is difficult to obtain a jackpot even though the state shifts to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol fluctuation is performed up to the specified number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to provide the player with a new entertainment that allows him to win a small hit RUSH and save time.

In addition, in the modification 4, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a case may be included in which the state shifts to a high probability non-time saving gaming state (latent probability variation) after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability of a jackpot being a probability-variable jackpot is set to 50%, and the probability of transitioning to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability-variable) is higher than that of shifting to another gaming state (first time-saving gaming state or normal state). You can make it higher.

[6-8-5. Modification 5]
Next, a fifth modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modification 5 is a modification of Modifications 1 to 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine, in which the variable pattern table is switched only when time reduction b is reached (reaching the ceiling), and the time reduction is entered from a specific performance. .

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process executed in S107 of FIG. ). When the number of operations is n, a special variation pattern table is selected (S4720), and when the number of operations is not n, a variation pattern table is selected (S4730), and a variation pattern is determined (S4740).

The special fluctuation pattern determined using the special fluctuation pattern table is a long fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and a special fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control circuit 4200 to the sub control circuit 4300. By receiving the special variation pattern command, the sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 starts a special symbol variation for production, and then executes a production that notifies a short time entry from a specific production. In modification 5, since the number of operations n is 750, a long fluctuation pattern is selected every 750 times.

According to the fifth modified example configured in this way, a long variation pattern is selected every 750 times and a specific performance is executed, thereby making it possible to give the player the impression that they have entered the b-time reduction period. Become.

FIG. 114 is an example of a specific performance executed in a long fluctuation pattern, and as shown in FIG. 114(a), during the fluctuation of the second identification symbol 4602 for performance, the performance In the special figure 2 reservation information 4612, character information is displayed in a variable manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the special figure 2 reservation information 4612 is displayed in a large size at the 751st variation, and as shown in FIG. 114(c), before the second identification symbol 4602 for production stops. Then, the variable display of the special drawing 2 reservation information 4612 stops and "time saving" is displayed. As a result, the player is notified of the shift to shorter working hours. In addition, when the said fluctuation|variation is a jackpot, as shown in FIG.114(d), "win" is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the fluctuation is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the player knows the number of special symbol fluctuations, it will be possible to predict entry into the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) at the time when the reservation notice appears. Note that when the c-time saving function is installed, if there is a hold that has a special stop mode, an effect as shown in FIG. 114 may be performed for that hold. Further, according to FIG. 114, the text information is displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 2 pending information 4612 for production, but the text information is not limited to this, and may be displayed in other display areas on the display device 4007 instead of in the special figure 2 pending information 4612. Changes in the text information may be displayed, and when the special symbol changes for the 750th time, the text "time saving" may be stopped and displayed. At this time, when changing the characters in the special figure 2 pending information 4612, it becomes possible to display the character changes from the 746th special figure change before the 4 changes, but when displaying the character changes alone, , it becomes possible to display the change in character information at an earlier timing, for example, at the start of the 740th change.

Note that the specific performance shown in FIG. 114 may be executed only when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the number of operations n. In this case, it is possible to notify the player that the second time saving game state (b time saving) is near at the time when the specific effect appears. Moreover, if there is a hold that will be a jackpot by looking ahead to the hold before the hold of the number of operations n, the specific effect shown in FIG. 114 may not be performed. This prevents players from feeling disappointed that if they hit the jackpot before entering the second time-saving gaming state (b-time saving), they will no longer be able to play in the second time-saving gaming state (b-time saving). This makes it possible to reduce the amount of interest in the game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, if there are a plurality of special symbol fluctuations pending, and there are several reservations before the suspension corresponding to the 750th variation, a countdown display may be performed as shown in FIG. 115. Specifically, it is assumed that there are four reservations, and the fourth reservation based on the last starting prize is the 751st variation. Then, in the next special figure variation, "3" as shown in Figure 115 (a), and in the next special figure variation, "2" as shown in Figure 115 (b), and in the next special figure variation. , as shown in FIG. 115(c), and at the start of the 751st special figure change, an image is displayed that notifies the b-time-saving entry and urges the player to hit the right, saying, "Start ceiling mode, hit right!" do. Note that, as shown in FIG. 115(d), the countdown display can be executed even if there is no pending ball corresponding to the 751st variation among the pending balls. For example, if there is a hold that performs a performance with high expectations for a jackpot among the held balls, a countdown is displayed, and then as shown in FIG. An effect may be performed to notify the reliability of the information. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115(f), a display may be made to notify the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until b time-saving entry, such as "123 more times until ceiling mode!". Since these notifications are performed by the same type of performance, the player can have a feeling of expectation that time will be shortened and a feeling of expectation that a jackpot will be awarded at the same time, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[6-8-6. Modification 6]
Next, a sixth modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Modified example 6 is the modified example 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine, in which the grand prize opening is opened and closed twice for a total opening time of approximately 1.8 seconds or less in a small winning game, and the total opening time is approximately 1.8 seconds or less. A 2-round jackpot with an opening operation that takes about 1.8 seconds or less is added, and a function is provided to reset the number of operations n when the 2-round jackpot is won. In addition, the opening of the big prize opening may be the same operation for small wins and jackpots. In Modified Example 4, it is desirable that the game board unit allows winnings to be made to the same big winning opening in the small winning game state and the jackpot gaming state. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between small winning games and jackpot games.

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect display when winning a small hit or a two-round jackpot. If you win a small hit or a 2-round jackpot, as shown in Figure 116(a), the text information "123 times to ceiling mode" and the text information "750 times to ceiling mode" will be displayed pushing against each other from side to side. When a small hit is won, a display is displayed to notify the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the current b-time reduction enters, ``123 times until ceiling mode'', as shown in FIG. 116(b). When winning the 2nd round jackpot, as shown in FIG. 116(c), a display notifying the reset number of remaining special symbol fluctuations, ``750 times to ceiling mode'', is displayed. This effect display appears when the player wins the 2nd round jackpot and when it is decided to perform an effect that notifies the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the start of b-time reduction. Note that the performance that notifies the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations may be a performance that suggests the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations.

According to the sixth modified example configured in this way, it is possible to provide a new game feature that improves the player's interest depending on whether or not the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the start of time reduction b is reset. becomes possible.

[6-8-7. Other variations]
Modifications 1 to 6 of the fifth pachinko game machine have been described above, but the modifications of the fifth pachinko game machine are not limited to those described above. For example, in Modifications 1 to 6, a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and a second time-saving game state (b time-saving) are installed, but the base value in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is The base value in the second time saving game state (b time saving) may be higher, or the base value in the second time saving gaming state (b time saving) may be higher than 100. For example, a plurality of special pattern 2 variation pattern tables are provided during b time saving, each special pattern 2 variation pattern table has a different variation time, and the special pattern 2 is designed to have a high probability of winning a small hit. As a result, when a long fluctuation pattern table is selected, the number of small winning balls per unit time is small, so the number of winning balls per unit time is reduced, and the base value becomes a low value that does not exceed 100, but it is short. When the variable pattern table is selected, the number of small winnings per unit time increases, so the number of prize balls per unit time increases, and the base value becomes a high value exceeding 100. In the modification of the pachinko game machine, the value of the number of operations n, which is a condition for entering b time saving, is fixed, but the number of operations n may have a plurality of values. For example, when the power is turned on or when a jackpot game ends, the number of times n of operation may be determined by random number lottery from among a plurality of candidate times. At this time, if the number of activations n is satisfied during the time saver a, the time saver b may not be activated. Further, for example, as in Modified Example 4, the number of times of time saving may be granted for a jackpot after reaching the ceiling (b time saving) than for a jackpot before reaching the ceiling (time saving b). Thereby, the expected value of the total number of balls that can be obtained after reaching the ceiling can be increased.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine and its modification described above, by installing b time saving, which can be said to be ceiling time saving, it is possible to make a difference between balls awarded after reaching the ceiling and balls awarded before reaching the ceiling. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[7. 6th pachinko game machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained. The sixth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and as detailed in the explanation of the third pachinko game machine, the jackpot game There are a first route and a second route as routes until the state is controlled. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.
The configuration and electrical configuration of the game board unit related to the sixth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the following description of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals used in the description of the third pachinko game machine will be used.

The sixth pachinko game machine has different basic specifications from the third pachinko game machine, and is particularly different in that it has a plurality of limiters.
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The process shown in FIG. 117 is the process shown in FIG. 29 with the limiter number management process of S204 added. In the limiter number management process, the main CPU 2201 sets the limiter number based on the number of special symbol fluctuations up to the jackpot when the jackpot is from a low probability state (non-probability variable state). In addition, in the case of a jackpot from a variable probability state, the number of loops of the jackpot is counted. Then, when the number of jackpot loops reaches the limiter number, a transition is made to a low probability state.

[7-1. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[7-1-1. Limiter count]
A limiter number of times is set in the sixth pachinko game machine, and "3" or "7" can be set as the limiter number of times in this pachinko game machine. Specifically, a limit of 3 times is set when a jackpot is won in the range of special drawing jackpot random numbers 1 to 100, and a limit of 7 times is set when a jackpot is won in the range of special drawing jackpot random numbers 51 to 100. , If a jackpot is won with a special jackpot random number of 101 or higher, a limit of 3 times is set. In addition, the special figure random number range in which the limit is set to 3 times and the special figure random number range in which the limit is set to 7 times can be set as appropriate. Further, the limiter number of times can also be set as appropriate.
Moreover, the selection ratio of the plurality of limit times may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, the limit number of times is set according to the special figure random number range, but the limit number of times may be set according to a section of a specific number of special figure fluctuations.

According to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, for example, if the number of special symbol changes becomes the 200th and the first jackpot is set, and a limit of 3 is set, if the first jackpot is included, the first time-saving gaming state (a If you win the jackpot 4 times in a row, you will reach the limiter number, and the jackpot when the limiter number is reached (the 4th jackpot) will not shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the jackpot game ends. controlled by. In addition, "4 times in a row" means that by alternately repeating the jackpot gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving), the jackpot that transitions to the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) is consecutive. This is to be executed four times. In addition, in the case of a jackpot game when the limiter number of times is reached, it is controlled not to shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the end of the jackpot game state, but this only depends on whether or not the limiter number of times is reached. This is due to the number of counts of the counter that manages this. In other words, if you win a jackpot that moves to the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) after the end of the jackpot gaming state unless the limiter number of times is reached (the random number extracted by the special symbol lottery becomes the jackpot determination, and the first time saving In the case where the special symbol that becomes the gaming state (a time saving) is a selected random number), the count number of the counter that manages whether or not the limiter number of times is reached is updated. Then, as a result of it being determined that the limiter number of times has been reached, control is performed so as not to shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the time saving game state shifts to the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) where the number of time saving times is 1 or 100 times. If a jackpot that does not shift to the first time-saving gaming state (a-time saving) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is won before the jackpot that moves to the first time-saving gaming state (a-time saving) is won four times in a row) At that time, the number of times that manages whether or not the limiter number of times is reached is reset (updated to 0, an initial value, etc.).

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the limiter number of times is the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, etc.)" between the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability change control is executed. (referred to as the "loop number"), but it can also be defined by the number of jackpots consecutively obtained by repeating a jackpot gaming state and a gaming state in which probability variable control is executed. .

[7-1-2. Jackpot, small hit probability]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 2201 detects winning of a game ball into the first starting port 2120, it performs a special drawing 1 lottery and performs a jackpot determination on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination.

Further, when the main CPU 2201 detects winning of a game ball into the second starting port 2140, it performs a special drawing 2 lottery and performs a jackpot determination on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the probability that the first special symbol lottery will result in a jackpot determination is approximately 1/319, and the probability that the first special symbol lottery will result in a small hit determination is 0. The probability of a jackpot determination in the second special symbol lottery is approximately 1/319, and the probability of a small hit determination is 1/3.75. In other words, since there is a possibility of a small hit, the probability of winning in the special drawing 2 lottery is lower than in the special drawing 1 drawing.

[7-1-3. Number of prize balls]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the number of prize balls awarded by winning into the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is "10", the number of prize balls awarded by winning the grand prize opening 2131 is "10", and the number of prize balls awarded by winning the first starting opening 2120 is "10". The number of balls is "4", the number of prize balls that enter the second starting slot 2140 is "4", and the number of prize balls that enter the general winning slot 2122 is "4".

[7-1-4. Count number of jackpot and small win gaming states]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the jackpot game state is 9, and the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the small win game state is 10.

[7-1-5. Jackpot allocation]
In the case of a jackpot winning by the special symbol 1 lottery or a jackpot winning by the special symbol 2 lottery, either "10" or "6" is selected as the number of rounds depending on the jackpot mode of the special symbol. The probability that the number of rounds will be "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds will be "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning hole 2155 in the small hit game state and shifts to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds will be either "10" or "6" depending on the small win mode of the second special symbol. is selected. The probability that the number of rounds will be "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds will be "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot is a jackpot that does not go through a small hit.

[7-1-6. Time reduction number distribution]
In the case of a special figure 1 jackpot or a special figure 2 jackpot, a transition is made to a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the time saving number according to the jackpot mode of the special symbol. In one special drawing jackpot, the probability that the number of time savings will be "100 times" is 50%, and the probability that the number of time savings will be "1 time" is 50%. In more detail, there are 6R jackpot and 10R jackpot as special map 1 jackpot, 50% of the jackpot is given once time saving in 6R jackpot, 49.5% is jackpot given 100 times in time saving with 6R jackpot, 10R jackpot The jackpot awarded 100 times in a short time is 0.5%.

The probability that the number of time reductions will be "100 times" in the special figure 2 jackpot is 100%. In addition, if the ball enters the V winning opening 2155 in the small winning gaming state and the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) is entered, and the number of time saving times is "100 times". will be granted. In addition, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole 2155 in the small winning game state, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends is maintained as the gaming state before the small winning gaming state ends. In other words, if the game state before the end of the small win game state is the normal game state, the game state after the end of the small win game state is the normal game state, and the game state before the end of the small win game state is the first time saving game state ( If it is (a time saving), the gaming state after the end of the small winning gaming state becomes the first time saving gaming state (a time saving). In this case, the number of time reductions will also inherit the number of time reductions before the end of the small winning game state. In addition, in the following explanation, entering a ball into the V winning hole 2155 may simply be referred to as a V winning.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, if you win with the special drawing 2 drawing as an opportunity and move to the jackpot gaming state (including small winning winnings and jackpots via V winning), after the jackpot gaming state ends, The first time saving game state (a time saving) is entered in which 100 time savings are given, but it is not limited to this, but after winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery and winning the jackpot via V winning, the game state ends. Then, if the jackpot game state is reached without going through 100 time savings, small winning of special drawing 2 lottery and V winning, one time saving may be given after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, 10% of the 6R jackpot in at least one of the special drawing 2 lottery and the special drawing 1 drawing may be made into a jackpot that does not shift to the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving). In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, since 0.5% is a 10R jackpot, the remaining 89.5% of special drawings 1 and 2 are 6R jackpots that shift to time saving. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery during the first time saving game state (a time saving), the control may be made such that the system always moves to the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) with 100 time savings. , it may be controlled so that a jackpot that does not necessarily shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) is won. In addition, it is also possible to express not shifting to the first time saving game state (a time saving) as "the number of time saving times is 0".

Further, the jackpot game state allows a round game to be played, while the small win game state basically does not include a round game. In the small winning game state, it is possible to open and close the large prize opening where the accessory continuous operating device does not operate. Here, after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous for the player (for example, the first time-saving game state (a time-saving)), but basically after the end of the small-win game state This prevents the transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous than before the transition to the small winning gaming state.

However, when the big winning hole (second big winning hole 2131) equipped with the specific area (V winning hole 2155) opens during the small winning game state and the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning hole 2155), When the conditional device is activated and the accessory continuous operation device is activated, after the small win game state ends, a transition is made to the jackpot game state which is an advantageous game state for the player. At this time, the small winning game state may also be counted in the number of rounds.

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, there is no difference in round allocation between the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 2 drawing and the jackpot gaming state triggered by the special drawing 1; There may be a case where it is easier to win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds than the round allocation in the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 1 lottery. Alternatively, there may be a case where the number of time reductions awarded after the end of the jackpot game state is larger for a jackpot triggered by the special drawing 2 drawing than a jackpot triggered by the special drawing 1 drawing. In addition, if the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is triggered by a special drawing 2 drawing or special drawing 1 drawing and transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the number of times the playing time-saving game is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state will reach the limiter. Unless otherwise specified, 100 times is desirable, but even during the first time saving game state (a time saving), a number smaller than 100 may be given, for example. Here, if you shift to the jackpot game state during the normal gaming state with the special drawing 2 drawing or special drawing 1 drawing as a trigger, one time saving will be given, but in the same way, 1 time saving will be given as the number is less than 100. You may also be given a time reduction. Furthermore, even when the limiter number of times has not been reached, it is possible to set a time reduction of 0 times.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, it is equipped with a time-saving function b, and on the condition that the special symbol fluctuation in the low probability state reaches a specified number of times (for example, 750 times), a second time-saving game state is entered. Move to (b time saving). The second time-saving game state (b time-saving) continues until either the condition of special figure 1 variation 5 times or special figure 2 variation 1 time is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, it shifts to the normal gaming state.

[7-2. Game flow]
FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game using the sixth pachinko game machine of the present invention.

In many cases, at the beginning of the game, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal gaming state, the player plays the game to the left and aims to win a prize in the first starting slot 2120. The first starting slot 2120 winning triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and when the special drawing 1 drawing is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) for one or 100 times. In the first time saving game state (a time saving), the player plays the game to the right and aims to pass the game ball to the passing gate 2126. In the first time saving game state (a time saving), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is in a high probability state, so the normal electric accessory 2146 is more likely to operate.

When the number of time-savings is "1 time", if the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the first time stops in a losing manner, the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes a low probability state. to move to. At this time, if there is a hold on the special figure 2 variation, the mode shifts to the pullback mode. If there is no pending special figure 2 variation, the mode shifts to normal mode. Here, if the special figure 2 variation is on hold, the game shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) and the first variation becomes the special figure 2 variation. The variation time of this first special figure 2 variation is made longer than 4 variations of the variation time of special figure 1. When the reserved special figure 2 variation stops in the jackpot mode, it moves to the jackpot game state, and when it stops in the small win mode, it stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win game state, and the small win game state When a player wins a V prize, the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state (hereinafter, this jackpot gaming state may be referred to as a V jackpot gaming state). After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) where the time saving is "100 times". In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the variation of the first special symbol is not counted in the number of time reductions. For this reason, when you win the special drawing 1 lottery and win for the first time, and the time saving "1 time" is awarded after the end of the jackpot game state, there is a suspension of the special drawing 1 fluctuation, and due to the suspension, the special drawing 1 fluctuation, Even if the stop is performed, the first time saving game state (a time saving) does not end.

According to the above explanation, when the number of time saving is "1 time", when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a losing manner, the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends and the normal symbol lottery starts. Although it has been explained that the winning probability shifts to a low probability state, it is not limited to this, but it is possible to win a small prize in the special drawing 2 lottery, open the big prize opening 2131 due to the small prize, and move to a specific area. If the ball does not enter the (V winning hole 2155), the first time saving game state (a time saving) may end after the small winning game state ends. In addition to the fluctuations due to special figure 2, when the end condition of the first time saving game state (a time saving) is that the number of fluctuations due to special figure 2 is 1, the fluctuation due to special figure 1 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is also possible to control the process to end when it is executed, or to end it after the number of small winnings is a predetermined number (for example, once).

When the time saving number is "100 times", if the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a losing manner on the 100th time, the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low. transition to state. At this time, if the special drawing 2 is on hold, the game shifts to the pullback mode (the final battle, which will be described later). If there is no special figure 2 on hold, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. If the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in the jackpot mode before the time saving number "100 times" is exhausted, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win game state, and wins a V prize in the small win game state. In this case, the game shifts to the V jackpot gaming state. After the V jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) of time saving "100 times".

The pullback mode shifts when the special drawing 2 is on hold after the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends. Here, the pullback mode is executed in a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability of winning both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery is low). In the pullback mode, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in the jackpot mode, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win gaming state, and if you win a V prize in the small winning gaming state, shift to the V jackpot gaming state do. After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) where the time saving is "100 times".

Further, when the number of consecutive jackpot hits reaches the limiter number, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. When transitioning to the normal gaming state, the limiter number of times is reset. If the special figure 2 variation is on hold when the game mode shifts to the normal gaming state, the pullback mode is started. If there is no suspension of special figure 2 variation, the game returns to the normal gaming state.

Therefore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, if you win 100 times in the first time, or even if you win only 1 time, you can enter the V jackpot game state by using the reserved special symbol 2 variation. If you shift to 100 time saving times and get 100 times, there is a high possibility that you will get a jackpot equal to the limiter times. Furthermore, even if you have won the jackpot for the limiter number of times, if the special drawing 2 is on hold, the game shifts to the pullback mode. When transitioning to the pullback mode, the limiter number is reset to 3 or 7 times. If the player wins the special drawing 2 jackpot, small hit, or V prize in the pull-back mode, there is a high possibility that he will get 100 time-savings and also get a jackpot equal to the limiter number.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, after winning a jackpot and further winning the jackpot for the limiter number of times, it shifts to the pullback mode in which the special figure 2 is held in the normal gaming state, and in this pullback mode, the special figure 2 It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide high interest in that by winning a V prize after a small win, in addition to the V jackpot, a jackpot equal to the limiter number can be obtained.

In addition, even if you cannot pull back the jackpot game state in the pullback mode, if the special figure random number becomes a jackpot in the range of 51 to 100, you can expect prize balls equivalent to 8 jackpot games, so you may want to continue playing. It becomes possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol variation is performed 750 times in the normal game state, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). When the second time saving game state (b time saving) is activated, an instruction image prompting the player to play right is displayed on the display device 2007, and by making the player play right, the player can obtain special drawing 2 reservation. Here, if there is a special figure 1 pending at the 750th time of special figure fluctuation, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is activated at the time when the special figure 1 variation due to this special figure 1 pending starts. If the fluctuation is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. If the special figure 2 variation is obtained while the variation is being performed, then the special figure 2 variation is started. At this point, the second time saving game state (b time saving) ends and the game shifts to the pullback mode. In the pullback mode, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in the jackpot mode, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win gaming state, and if you win a V prize in the small winning gaming state, shift to the V jackpot gaming state do. After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) where the time saving is "100 times". When the special figure 2 is no longer on hold, the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol variation is performed 750 times in the normal gaming state, the player is given the opportunity to win the V jackpot. As a result, even in the so-called addictive state where it is difficult to obtain a jackpot in the normal gaming state, by repeating the number of special symbol fluctuations, you will have the opportunity to obtain a V jackpot, and when you win a V jackpot, It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide a high level of interest in that it is possible to win four jackpots until the limiter number is reached.
In addition, when the number of special figure variations is 1 to 750 times, the limiter number may be set to 3 times, and after 751 times, the limiter number may be set to 7 times. This makes it possible to relieve a player who has fallen into an addictive state.

In addition, in the case where the limiter count is given 3 times and when the limiter count is given 7 times, the effect displayed on the display device 2007, for example, changes the character displayed in the reach effect. Part of it may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 119(a), after winning a jackpot and completing the first jackpot game, the display device 2007 temporarily displays "3 more times" (FIG. 119(b)), and the limiter number is set to 7. In the case of the number of times, a promotion effect may be performed that changes the display to "seven more times" (FIGS. 119(c) and (d)). Alternatively, after the end of the fourth jackpot game, the display device 2007 may temporarily display "Not yet! 3 more times", and if the limiter number is 7 times, a promotion effect may be performed in which the display is switched to "7 more times". good.

Further, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the number of limiters is determined based on the special pattern random number range, but the number of limiters may be changed depending on the jackpot stop mode of special pattern fluctuations in a low probability state.

Further, an effect suggesting the limiter number of times may be performed during the first time saving game state of 100 time savings after the end of the jackpot game state or during the jackpot game state.
FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance screen after the end of the jackpot game state due to the first win. The display device 2007 displays a group of disks 2620 indicating the limiter count. FIG. 120(a) is an example of the effect screen when the limiter count is "3", and three discs 2620 are displayed. Then, in the special figure variation that results in a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a fighter plane 2630 is displayed on the display device 2007, and when an attack is made on the disk 2620, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. After finishing, one disk 2620 is repelled and two disks 2620 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(c). After that, the number of discs 2620 decreases each time the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and as shown in FIG. 120(d), after the last disc 2620 is shot down, the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it shifts to the pullback mode. do.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance screen after the end of the jackpot game state due to the first win. FIG. 121(a) is an example of the production screen when the limiter count is "7", and a total of three discs are displayed: two discs 2620 and one disc 2621 whose design is partially different from the disc 2620. . The disk 2621 is a character that will be shot down if it is attacked twice by the fighter plane 2630. FIG. 121(a) suggests that four jackpots are guaranteed. Then, as shown in FIG. 121(b), when the disk 2620 is attacked, the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, the disk 2621 is moved to the disk 2620 as shown in FIG. 121(c). Changes to display two disks 2620. Further, in the first time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 121(d), the disk 2621 or the disk 2620 may be reinforced. FIG. 121(d) suggests that six jackpots are guaranteed.

In this way, when the limiter number is "7", by displaying the disk 2621 or reinforcing the disk 2621 or the disk 2620, if the fighter 2630 makes a total of 7 attacks, all The effect is displayed so that the disk 2621 or the disk 2620 is shot down.

Note that even when the limiter count is "3", by displaying, for example, one disk 2620 first and then displaying the disk 2621, or by reinforcing the disk 2621 or the disk 2620, the fighter jet 2630 can reach a total of 3. An effect may be displayed so that all discs 2621 or 2620 are shot down when the third attack is performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 121(e), the disc 2620 is made invincible and cannot be shot down, or as shown in FIG. 121(f), the item 2622 is combined with the disc 2620 and the disc 2620 is promoted to the disc 2621. It also becomes possible to perform. Furthermore, by adding effects such as fighter jet 2630 shooting down multiple saucers 2620 in one attack, more diverse effects are possible.For example, at first the limiter number seemed to be "7". However, it is also possible to create an effect in which the limiter count is actually "3".

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine described above, when the end condition of the first time-saving game state is 1 or 100 variations of the special figure 1, the end condition of the second time-saving game state is the special figure. Although it is set when the number of fluctuations of 2 is used up once, the winning of a small hit or the number of executions may be set as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the time-saving game state ends depending on whether the time-saving game state wins a small hit or the number of executions. Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state may be ended when a special small winning symbol is won or when a special small winning symbol is displayed.

[7-3. Modification example 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a first modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. The above-mentioned sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine equipped with a limiter function and a time saving function, but the first modification of the sixth pachinko game machine is Like the first and second pachinko game machines, this is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine equipped with a limiter function and a time-saving function. Note that the game board unit of Modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine is the same as the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

[7-3-1. Limiter count]
The limiter number of times in Modification 1 is the same as that of the sixth pachinko gaming machine described above, and "3" or "7" can be set as the limiter number of times. Specifically, a limit of 3 times is set when a jackpot is won when the random number for determining a special drawing jackpot is in the range of 1 to 50, and a jackpot is obtained when the random number for determining a special drawing jackpot is in the range of 51 to 100. In this case, a limit of 7 times is set, and when a jackpot is obtained when the random number value for special map jackpot determination is 101 or higher, a limit of 3 times is set.

[7-3-2. Jackpot probability]
In the first modification, the probability of determining a jackpot in the first and second special symbol drawings is about 1/319 at low probability and about 1/94 at high probability. In addition, a case may be included in which a small hit is determined in the first and second special symbol drawings.

[7-3-3. Number of prize balls]
In modification example 1, the number of prize balls won by winning the grand prize opening is "10", the number of prize balls won by winning the first and second openings is "4", and the number of prize balls winning the general prize opening is "4". ”.

[7-3-4. Jackpot count]
In the first modification, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the jackpot game state is nine. In addition, when a small win is included, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the small win game state is set to 10, for example.

[7-3-5. Jackpot allocation]
In the case of a jackpot winning by the special symbol 1 lottery or a jackpot winning by the special symbol 2 lottery, either "10" or "6" is selected as the number of rounds depending on the jackpot mode of the special symbol.

[7-3-6. Definite distribution]
In the normal gaming state (low-probability, non-time-saving state), if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing or a jackpot winning in the special drawing 2 drawing, you will be transferred to the high probability state (variable probability state) at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 90%. The state shifts to a low probability state (non-determinable state). In the variable probability state or time-saving gaming state, if a jackpot is won by the special drawing 1 drawing or a jackpot is won by the special drawing 2 drawing, the state shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) at a rate of 100%.

[7-3-7. Time reduction number distribution]
If you win a special figure 1 jackpot or a special figure 2 jackpot from the normal gaming state and move to a high probability state (probability variable state) after the jackpot gaming state ends, you will move to the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) and effectively If the number of time savings until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times) is set and the transition to the high probability state (variable probability state) is not made after the end of the jackpot game state, the first time reduction gaming state (a time reduction) with the number of time savings of 100 times is set. to move to. If you win a special figure 1 jackpot or a special figure 2 jackpot in a variable probability state or a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state (a time-saver) or second time-saving game state (b time-saver)), it is practically until the next jackpot. The number of time saving times (for example, 10,000 times) is set, and when the limiter number is reached and the game shifts to a low probability state (non-probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving number of 100 times is set.
In addition, in the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving state), if the specified number of operations n (for example, 750 times) is exhausted without winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, for example, the second time-saving number of 100 times Transition to the time saving game state (b time saving).

[7-3-8. Flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game using the sixth modification example 1 of the pachinko game machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 122.
As shown in FIG. 122, in the first modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is often started from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal gaming state, the player plays to the left and advances the game with the aim of winning the first starting slot 1120. The first starting slot 1120 winning triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and when the special drawing 1 drawing is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, the game shifts to the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) until the next jackpot. If the state does not shift to the variable probability state, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) for the number of time-savings of 100 times. In the first time-saving game state (time-saving a), the player plays the game with the aim of passing the game ball to the passage gate 1126 by hitting the ball to the right. In the first time saving game state (a time saving), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is in a high probability state, so the normal electric accessory 1146 becomes easier to operate.

When the first hit is used as an opportunity to shift to a variable probability state, it becomes possible to obtain a jackpot equal to the limiter number of times. Further, even if the player shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) with the number of time saving times of 100 times triggered by the first win, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to obtain the jackpot equal to the limiter number of times. Note that the limiter number of times is also decreased by 1 when a jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with a time-saving number of 100 times.

When the limiter number of times is reached, after the jackpot game state ends, a transition is made to a first time saving game state (a time saving) in which time is saved 100 times. If you can win a jackpot in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 time-savings, the limiter number is reset, so after the jackpot game due to the jackpot ends, you can play a new jackpot game for the limiter number of times. can be obtained. If the jackpot cannot be won in the 100 time savings, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the 100 time savings have been completed. In this way, in the first modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the key is whether or not a jackpot can be won in the 100 time-saving games after reaching the limiter number of times.

In addition, in the 100 time saving after reaching the limiter number, if you get a jackpot between 1 and 50 times of special symbol fluctuations, a limit of 3 times will be set, and if you get a jackpot between 51 and 100 times, a limit will be set. The specification may be set to 7 times. In this case, since the number of time reductions is in the second half, it becomes possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot.

Further, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol variation is performed 750 times in the normal game state, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) in which the number of time-savings is 100 times. When the second time saving game state (b time saving) is activated, an instruction image prompting the player to play right is displayed on the display device 1007, and by making the right play, the player can obtain special drawing 2 reservation. As a result, in the same way as in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) where the number of time-savings is 100, if a jackpot can be won in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game due to the jackpot ends, , it is also possible to newly obtain jackpot games equal to the limiter number of times. If the jackpot cannot be won in the 100 time savings, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the 100 time savings have been completed.

In this way, in the first modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, more prize balls can be won by winning the jackpot in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 time-savings after reaching the limiter number of times. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be expected and highly entertaining. Moreover, even if the state where the jackpot cannot be won continues for a long time, if the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 750 times, the number of time savings will shift to the second time saving game state (b time saving) where the number of time savings is 100 times, If the player wins a jackpot in the gaming state (time saving b), he can expect at least four prize balls worth of jackpot games, so it becomes possible to relieve a player who has fallen into an addicted state.

In addition, similarly to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the first modification, it may be possible to set the limiter number to 3 times when the number of special symbol fluctuations is 1 to 750 times, and to 7 times after 751 times. . In addition, in the case where the limiter count is given 3 times and the case where the limiter count is given 7 times, the effect displayed on the display device 1007 is changed, for example, by changing the character displayed in the reach effect. Part of it may be changed. Furthermore, after the end of the first jackpot game, the display device 1007 may temporarily display "3 more times", and when the limiter number is 7 times, a promotion effect may be performed in which the display is switched to "7 more times". Alternatively, after the fourth jackpot game is over, the display device 1007 may temporarily display "Not yet! 3 more times", and if the limiter number is 7 times, a promotion effect may be performed in which the display is switched to "7 more times". good.

In addition, in the same way as the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in Modification 1, the limiter number is determined by random numbers for jackpot determination, but the limiter number is changed depending on the jackpot stop mode of special symbol fluctuation in a low probability state. You can.

[7-4. Modification example 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, a second modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modification 2 has a limiter function, and is a modification in which the configuration of the game board unit in Modification 1 is partially changed, and the specifications regarding jackpots and small wins are partially changed.

[7-4-1. Game board unit configuration]
FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of a game board unit according to Modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the game board unit according to the second modification, a small winning unit 1150 is newly arranged in the game board unit 1010 according to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. This is a changed arrangement of . In the second modification shown in FIG. 123, the same reference numerals are given to the same members or members with the same functions as those in the game board unit 1010 of the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Further explanation will be omitted.

The small hit unit 1150 is arranged at the upper part of the left side area 1106, as shown in FIG. 123. The small winning unit 1150 has the same configuration as the small winning unit 150 included in the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Furthermore, a passage gate unit 1125B in the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. It is configured such that it always passes through the passage gate 1126B before. Note that the second modification includes a passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107, similar to the game board unit 1010 shown in FIG. In the second modification, the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107 will be referred to as a passage gate unit 1125A, and the passage gate 1126 will be referred to as a passage gate 1126A. Further, a normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged below the first starting port 1120. The normal electric accessory 1146 can capture a game ball whether the ball is hit left-handed or right-handed.

For this reason, when a small hit is won in the special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 lottery, it becomes possible to win a prize in the small winning large prize opening 1151 by hitting to the left. Moreover, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings, the prize is entered into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131.

Furthermore, if you win a jackpot or small hit in the special drawing 1 drawing, you enter the small winning jackpot 1151, and if you win a jackpot or small jackpot in the special drawing 2 drawing, you enter the jackpot large winning opening 1131. good. As a result, a jackpot game or a small win game based on the special drawing 1 drawing can be advanced by hitting the left hand, and a jackpot game or a small winning game based on the special drawing 2 drawing can be advanced by hitting the right hand. In the time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and the second time-saving game state (b time-saving)), it is easier for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 1126A, so it is advantageous to advance it by right-handed hitting. be. In addition, it is also possible to hit to the right in the normal gaming state, allow the game ball to pass through the passage gate 1126A, and aim to win the prize in the second starting port 1140 by winning a common symbol. However, in modification 2, the special pattern 2 variation is not held, and the special pattern 1 variation can be held up to 4 times, so it is more likely that players will hit left-handed and aim to win at the first starting opening 1120. The specifications are such that the special drawing can be changed.

[7-4-2. Special map 1, special map 2 pending]
In modification 2, special figure 2 is given priority over special figure 1 and variation is performed. Moreover, as mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation is not held, and the special figure 1 variation can be held up to 4 times. In the normal gaming state, the variation pattern determination table is set so that the variation pattern of special figure 1 lasts approximately 10 seconds. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure is extremely short, and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is set to be a little longer, for example, about 2 seconds. Here, when the special drawing 1 changes, it always passes through the passage gate 1126B, so as soon as the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electricity line opens, but at this time the special drawing 1 has already changed. Even if you win the normal electric accessory 1146 that was released while the special figure 1 is changing, the special figure 2 variation is not held, so you cannot make the special figure 2 variation. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the special drawing 2 does not change even if the normal electric accessory 1146 is won, so the second starting opening 1140 becomes a base winning opening like the general winning opening.

[7-4-3. Small hit]
Small winnings are included in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing. In particular, the special drawing 2 lottery is set up so that it is easy to win a small hit. In the variation pattern determination table of special figure 1, a pattern with a short variation time is selected in response to a small hit. Specifically, since the fluctuation pattern of special drawing 1 is about 10 seconds, a fluctuation pattern determination table is prepared in which a 1/10th fluctuation pattern is selected, and when a small hit occurs, the table is switched to the 1/10 fluctuation pattern determination table. . Then, after the special figure 1 variation, the variation pattern determination table is returned to its original state.

As a result, for example, if the 1/10 variation pattern is selected, the special pattern 1 variation will have ended by the time you win the normal symbol lottery and win the normal electric accessory 1146, and the special pattern 2 will be changed. It may be possible to change. Since it is easy to win a small prize in the special drawing 2 lottery, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) can be won by opening the small winning large prize opening 1151 and winning a game ball.

Note that states with base values of 50, 70, and 90 can be created by changing the 1/10 fluctuation pattern determination table to 1/8 and 1/6 fluctuation pattern determination tables. Note that a table may be prepared in which time variation patterns of 1/10, 1/8, and 1/6 are selected, and one of them may be determined by random number lottery.

[7-4-4. Jackpot]
Modified example 2 is equipped with a two-round jackpot in which the round game time is relatively short. In the case of a 2nd round jackpot, as in Modification Example 1, there is a 10% probability that the game will move to a high probability state (probability variable state) and the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) until the next jackpot, and a 90% probability that it will be a low probability state. The game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) in which the probability state (non-probability variable state) and the number of time saving times is 100.

[7-4-5. Production screen]
In modification 2, in order to shift to the second time saving game state (b time saving) on the condition that the special symbol has been changed 750 times in the normal game state, b time saving is activated at the start of the 751st special symbol variation. The stop mode of the identification symbol for performance in this 751st special symbol variation, and the 2nd round jackpot from the normal gaming state and the low probability state (non-probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state and the 100th first time-saving gaming state The stop mode of the identification symbol for performance in the special symbol fluctuation that becomes the 2nd round normal jackpot, which shifts to (a time saving), becomes the stop mode by the common special symbol.

FIG. 124 is an example of an effect executed in a special figure variation when entering the second time saving game state (time saving b) or a special figure variation that becomes a normal jackpot in the second round, and the first identification for the effect is displayed on the display device 1007. A symbol 1601 and first special symbol reservation information 1611 for presentation are displayed. When the first identification symbol 1601 for performance related to the special symbol variation upon entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) or the special symbol variation resulting in a normal jackpot in the second round begins to vary, as shown in FIG. 124(a). As such, the first identification symbol 1601 for presentation becomes a ready-to-win mode, and hereafter, a ready-to-win presentation is started. Then, at the end of the reach performance, as shown in FIG. 124(b), the first identification symbol 1601 for the performance temporarily stops in a dislocated state, and then, as shown in FIG. 124(c), the first identification symbol 1601 for the performance temporarily stops. The first identification symbols 1601 all change again and stop at the special symbol ``time saver'', ``time saver'', as shown in FIG. 124(d). In addition, the first identification symbol 1601 for production in the form of time saving may be displayed other than the special symbol variation when entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) and the production in the special symbol variation that becomes a normal jackpot in the second round. There isn't.

According to the second modified example configured in this way, in the special symbol fluctuation when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) and the special symbol fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot in the second round, a stop is caused by a common special symbol as a performance display. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to judge whether the first time saving game state (a time saving) has entered or the second time saving gaming state (b time saving) has entered.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification 2, the c time saving function is not installed, but the c time saving function may be installed. , the stopping mode of the first identification symbol 1601 for presentation may be stopped with a special symbol "time saving - time saving - time saving".

[7-5. Modification example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, a third modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. In the third modification, multiple types of limiter counts can be set similarly to the sixth pachinko game machine, and the configuration of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 is partially changed, This is a partial change to the specifications regarding jackpots and small wins.

[7-5-1. Game board unit configuration]
FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of a game board unit according to modification example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the game board unit according to the third modification, a rotating accessory 185 is newly arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. A second starting port 140B is arranged. Note that the second starting port 140 related to the first pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 4 will be referred to as a second starting port 140A. In the third modification shown in FIG. 125, the same reference numerals as those in the game board unit 10 of the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Further explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration and operation of the rotating accessory 185. The rotating accessory 185 includes a disc 185a, a notch 185b, a rotating shaft 185c, and a rotating motor (not shown) that transmits rotation to the rotating shaft 185c and rotates the disc 185a at a constant speed. There is. The disc 185a has a slightly larger thickness than the game ball, and has one notch 185b extending in the radial direction on the outer periphery. This notch 185b has a size that can accommodate one game ball. The rotation axis of the disc 185a is erected at the center of the disc 185a perpendicular to the board surface.

The rotating accessory 185 is arranged in front of the second starting port 140B arranged in the left side area 106. At this time, the second starting port 140B is positioned closer to the top of the rotating accessory 185 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the second starting port 140B is hidden behind the rotating accessory 185, but immediately after the rotating accessory 185 rotates and the notch 185b passes the top, the second starting port 140B passes through the notch 185b. becomes visible. Further, two game nails are planted near the upper side of the rotating accessory 185 in the left side area 106 at a slightly larger interval than the game balls.

When the game ball passes between the two game nails near the upper part of the rotating accessory 185 at the timing when the notch 185b passes the top, the game ball is placed in the notch 185b as shown in FIG. 126(a). The ball is contained. In this state, the rotating accessory 185 rotates, and as shown in FIG. 126(b), when the notch 185b reaches the second starting port 140B, the game ball in the notch 185b moves to the second starting port 140B. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the inside of the notch 185b becomes empty. If the game ball enters between the two game nails near the top of the rotating accessory 185 before the notch 185b returns to the top again, as shown in FIGS. 126(c) and 126(d), The game ball is maintained on the top of the rotating accessory 185, and when the notch 185b reaches the top, the game ball is placed in the notch 185b as shown in FIG. 126(a). be accommodated. By repeating such an operation, the game ball enters the second starting port 140B at regular time intervals when the ball is hit to the left.

[7-5-2. Special figure 1, special figure 2 variation]
In modification 3, special figure 1 and special figure 2 can be varied at the same time. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern determination table that determines the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 determines a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of approximately 10 minutes, and the fluctuation pattern determination table that determines the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 determines a fluctuation pattern of approximately 10 minutes. A variation pattern with a variation time of approximately 2 minutes is determined.

[7-5-3. Small hit]
Small winnings are included in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing. In particular, the special drawing 1 lottery is set up so that it is easy to win a small hit. In addition, if you win a small hit in the normal gaming state, the opening time of the small winning large prize opening 151 in the small winning gaming state is relatively short, so even if you win a small hit when hitting left-handed, there is a possibility that you can win the prize ball. has a low specification.

[7-5-4. others]
In the third modification, the number of prize balls that land in the second starting port 140B is "1". For this reason, even if game balls hit the second starting port 140B at fixed time intervals when playing left-handed, the number of balls held will not increase. Other specifications are generally the same as the sixth pachinko game machine, but the configuration is such that when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the V attacker does not operate and the V prize cannot be won. In addition, like the sixth pachinko game machine, Modification 3 is equipped with a time-saving function b, and the special symbol fluctuation in the normal state, that is, the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, is limited to the specified number of operations n (for example, 750 times). ), the time-saving function b is activated and the game enters the second time-saving game state.

[7-5-5. Production screen]
Based on the command sent from the main control circuit 200, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 calculates the total number of variations of the special symbol (the sum of the number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the number of variations of the special symbol 2) in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. ), the number of variations of the special symbol 1, and the number of display variations, which is the number of variations of the special symbol displayed on the display device 7, are controlled. The number of display fluctuations is the cumulative addition of the number of additions to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1, and the number of additions is appropriately determined from a number less than or equal to the difference between the total number of fluctuations and the number of display fluctuations.

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 7 in the third modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 127(a) shows an example of the production screen displayed on the display device 7 at the start of the normal state, that is, the low-probability non-time-saving state. 601, special figure 1 reservation information 611, and variation number information 621 that displays the number of display variations. In the normal state, it is possible to win to the first starting port 120A and the second starting port 140, so the special symbol 1 variation or the special symbol 2 variation is displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. will be held. On the other hand, on the display device 7, a special symbol 1 identification symbol 4601 for production corresponding to the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display section 4163 is displayed. The special symbol for performance and the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol to be displayed are not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the fluctuation number information 621 is displayed as "0" at the start of the normal state, that is, the low probability non-time saving state, and when the fluctuation stops, as shown in FIG. 127(b). "1" is displayed. At this time, if Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are fluctuating at the same time, and the result of Tokuzu 1 lottery is a small hit, Tokuzu 2 will also stop, so the total number of fluctuations will be "2", and the Tokuzu 1 lottery will be a small hit. If the result of the FIG. 1 lottery is a loss, the special drawing 2 will not stop, so the total number of fluctuations will be "1".

In modification example 3, when a small hit occurs after reaching the reach effect, an addition is made to the number of times displayed in the variation number of times information 621. In the variation number information 621, the number of variations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the initial state, and the number of additions is cumulatively added each time a small hit is achieved through a reach effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(c), it is assumed that the fluctuation number information 621 is displayed as "200", but the total number of fluctuations is "300". In this state, as shown in FIG. 127(d), there is a reach effect, and after the reach effect, the special figure 1 identification symbol 601 for effect stops as shown in FIG. 127(e), and the fluctuation number information 621 is changed to 201”. Here, when transitioning to the small winning gaming state, the number of additions is set within the range less than or equal to the difference between the total number of fluctuations "300" and the number of times "200" displayed as the number of fluctuations information 621, that is, the range of 0 to 100. The sub CPU 301 determines. For example, if it is determined to be 50 times, "+50" is displayed as shown in FIG. 127(e), and the variation number information 621 changes to "251" as shown in FIG. 127(f).

According to the third modified example configured in this way, since the game ball enters the second starting port 140B at regular time intervals when playing left-handed, the special pattern 1 variation and the special pattern 2 variation are performed at the same time. It is possible to increase the chances, and if you win a small hit with the special pattern 1 fluctuation, the special pattern 2 fluctuation will also be forcibly stopped, so the special pattern fluctuation will be reduced by the number of times n of activations until b time saving is activated. It can be digested quickly.
In addition, when a small hit occurs after reaching the reach effect, a predetermined number is added to the number of times the variable frequency information 621 is displayed, so it is possible to increase the interest in the reach effect and give the impression that b time is getting closer to being shortened. become.

[7-6. Modification example 4 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, a fourth modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modified example 4 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured such that when the b time saving function is activated in the modified example 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, a small hit RUSH state is entered. Furthermore, in the fourth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied.

[7-6-1. Jackpot probability]
In the fourth modification, the probability of determining a jackpot in the first and second special symbol drawings is about 1/319 at low probability and about 1/94 at high probability. The probability of determining a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0, and the low probability of determining a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is, for example, 1/10, and the high probability is 0.

[7-6-2. Time-saving gaming state]
The probability of winning the general drawing lottery in the first time-saving game state (a time saving) is higher than the winning probability of the general drawing drawing in the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of the general drawing drawing in the second time saving gaming state (b working time saving) is , is the same as the probability of winning in the regular game lottery in the normal gaming state.

The opening time of the normal electric accessory when a common figure is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is longer than the opening time of the normal electric accessory when a common figure is won in the normal game state, but in the second time-saving game state The opening time of the normal electric accessory when the ordinary figure is won in (b time saving) is the same as the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory when the ordinary figure is won in the normal game state.

The regular figure fluctuation time in the first time saving game state (a time saving) and the second time saving game state (b time saving) is set shorter than the regular figure fluctuation time in the normal gaming state. In addition, the regular figure fluctuation time in the second time saving game state (b time saving) is set to be significantly shorter than the regular figure fluctuation time in the first time saving gaming state (a time saving).

According to the fourth modified example configured in this way, when b time saving in the non-winning easy state (no opening extension function) is activated when the ceiling is reached (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches the number of activations n), the normal electric role Since the opening time of the object 146 is not extended, the game ball that was not captured by the normal electric accessory 146 will flow into the small winning large winning opening 151, and the game ball will enter the small winning large winning opening 151 in the small winning gaming state. It becomes possible to win the ball. In addition, the time required to win a small hit is shortened by quickly digesting the normal pattern fluctuations, so it is possible to frequently shift to the small winning game state and win prize balls. In this way, when b time saving is activated, the so-called small hit RUSH is activated.

[7-7. Modification example 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a fifth modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modified example 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is that in modified example 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the b time-saving function is activated, the probability of winning a regular figure is slightly different from that in the normal gaming state. Yes, it is equipped with a so-called slight time saver that does not change the operation of ordinary electric accessories. Furthermore, in the fourth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 according to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 can be applied.

[7-7-1. Specifications of modification 5]
The specification of the fifth modification is that the probability of determining a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is approximately 1/99 in a low probability state and approximately 1/66 in a high probability state. The probability of a small hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is 0. The probability of a jackpot determination in the second special symbol lottery is 1/99 in a low probability state and about 1/66 in a high probability state. In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of determining a small hit is about 97/99 in a low probability state and about 67/69 in a high probability state.
The probability that special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 jackpots in the normal gaming state are variable jackpots is 50%, and the probability that they are normal jackpots is 50%. The probability that a special figure 1 jackpot in a high probability state is a variable jackpot is 100%, and the probability that it is a normal jackpot is 0%.
The probability of winning in the general drawing lottery is, for example, 10/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

The number of definite variations and the number of time savings in the first time saving game state (a time saving) are both 90 times, and after the end of the jackpot game, if the special symbol variation reaches 90 times, if it is a high probability state, it will shift to a low probability state. Then, the first time saving game state (a time saving) shifts to the normal game state.

Modified example 5 is provided with a time saving function b, and the number of operations n for entering the time saving function b is set to a relatively small number of times, for example, 90 times. Although the number of times N can be set as appropriate, it is set to 10 times, for example. The winning probability in the regular game lottery in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is, for example, 11/256 in the normal game state. Here, according to the fifth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the fourth pachinko game machine, in the first time saving game state (a time saving), the normal electric accessory 3146 is operated by the so-called electric chew support. When a game ball is captured, the first non-electric accessory 3441 opens, making it easier to win in the first starting opening 3120, and difficult to win in the second starting opening 3140. In the second time saving game state (b time saving), when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball by the so-called electric chew support, the second non-electric accessory 3441 opens and enters the second starting port 3140. It becomes easy to win a prize, and it is difficult to win a prize in the first starting opening 3120.

In addition, when winning a jackpot in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the setting is more advantageous for the player than when winning the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal game state. If you win a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot in the normal gaming state, you will receive 90 time savings, but if you win a jackpot in the second time saving gaming state (b time savings), you will receive 10,000 time savings until the next jackpot. Time savings will be given.

Next, the flow of a game using the fifth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 128.
As shown in FIG. 128, in the fifth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is often started from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal gaming state, the player plays the game to the left and aims to win the prize in the first starting opening 3120. The first starting slot 3120 winning triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and when the special drawing 1 drawing is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the game shifts to a high probability time saving gaming state (a time saving) in which the probability variable number and the time saving number are 90 times. If the state does not shift to the variable probability state, the state shifts to a low probability time saving game state (a time saving) in which the number of time saving times is 90 times.

After the end of the jackpot game state, the game shifts to the jackpot game state again in which a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the 90th first time-saving game state. At this time, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state due to the variable probability jackpot, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches the specified number of times (limiter number), after the end of the jackpot game state that reached the specified number of times (limiter number), A transition is made to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a probability state. Note that the number of loops is reset when transitioning to a low probability state.

When the number of time savings (90 times) in the first time saving game state (a time saving) is exhausted, from the next special figure fluctuation, the number of time saving times will change to the second time saving game state (b time saving) where the time saving number is 10 times in the special figure 2 variation. Transition. When a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the second time saving game state (b time saving), the game shifts to the first time saving gaming state (a time saving) where the number of time saving times is 10,000. When the number of time savings 10 times is exhausted in the second time saving game state (b time saving), a transition is made to the normal game state which is a low probability non-time saving state.
In addition, the number of operations n to enter b time saving, the number of time saving times N, and the advantage for the player in the case of winning the jackpot in the second time saving gaming state (b time saving) are not limited to those described above, It can be set as appropriate.

According to the fifth modified example configured in this way, by winning a jackpot during the second time saving game state (b time saving), even if the player normally wins a jackpot, the time saving will be granted until the next jackpot (10,000 time savings). Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the interest in the second time saving game state (b time saving).

Note that the fifth modification is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but includes, for example, a benefit given to the player according to the number of times the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) is acquired before winning the jackpot in the low probability state. may be made larger. For example, applying the specifications of Modified Example 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the greater the number of times the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) acquired before winning the jackpot in the low probability state, the larger the limiter number becomes. It may also be possible to select. In addition, in the fifth modification described above, the number of fluctuations in the high probability state is also included in the number of operations n for activating the second time saving game state (b time saving), but the number of fluctuations in the high probability state is also included. Instead, when the special symbol fluctuation is performed the number of times n (90 times) after the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, the second time saving game state (b time saving) may be made. This makes it possible to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing the game by changing the special symbols only 90 more times, rather than ending the game immediately after the jackpot game ends.

Moreover, although the above-mentioned modification 5 is an example in which the game board unit 3010 according to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 is applied, other game board units may be used. For example, in the game board unit 3010 related to the fourth pachinko game machine, the first actuation mechanism 3511, the second actuation mechanism 3512, the first non-motorized accessory 3440, and the first non-motorized accessory 3440 are deleted and distributed. The game balls sorted by the device 3506 may directly enter the first starting opening 3120 and the second starting opening 3140. Furthermore, in the game board unit 1010 related to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45, a second first starting port 1120 is provided instead of the second starting port 1140, that is, only the special drawing 1 lottery is provided. It is also applicable to what you do. However, in this case, if you win the jackpot in the normal gaming state or the first time saving game state (a time saving), 90 time savings will be given after the jackpot state ends, and you will win the jackpot in the second time saving gaming state (b time saving). If you do, you will receive 10,000 time savings after the jackpot condition ends.

Further, according to the fifth modification described above, when the number of loops reaches the prescribed number of times (limiter number of times), after the jackpot game state in which the number of loops reached the prescribed number of times (limiter number of times) ends, the state shifts to the low probability time saving game state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the game may be shifted to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Further, the number of loops may also be the number of loops between the time saving gaming state and the jackpot gaming state.

[7-8. Modification example 6 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, a sixth modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modified example 6 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the modified example 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in which the first pachinko gaming machine This is to switch the contents of the 2-time saving game state (b-time saving). Furthermore, in the sixth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied.

[7-8-1. Specifications of modification 6]
The specifications of the sixth modification are substantially the same as those described for the first pachinko game machine. The probability of winning in the general drawing lottery is, for example, 50/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

Furthermore, the content of the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is determined based on the random number value obtained by random number lottery for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the number of operations is n.

FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the sixth modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 129, in the sixth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is often started from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal gaming state, the player plays the game to the left and aims to win a prize in the first starting slot 120. The first starting slot 120 winning triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and when the special drawing 1 drawing is won, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the game shifts to a high probability state and also shifts to a first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) where the number of time-savings is 0 or 10,000. In other words, the state shifts to a potential state or a variable state with electric chew support. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game shifts to a low probability state and also shifts to a first time saving gaming state (a time saving) where the number of time saving times is 50.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to a jackpot game state again in which a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery in the first time-saving game state. At this time, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state due to the variable probability jackpot, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches the specified number of times (limiter number), after the end of the jackpot game state that reached the specified number of times (limiter number), A transition is made to a first time saving game state (a time saving) which is a probability state. The loop count is reset when transitioning to a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state that reaches the specified number of times (limiter number of times) ends, it may be shifted to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state).

In the low probability state, when the number of time savings (50 times) in the first time saving game state (a time saving) is exhausted, the game shifts to the normal gaming state.
When the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 750 times, a transition is made to the second time saving game state (b time saving) from the next special symbol fluctuation. The winning probability and fluctuation time of the regular symbol lottery in the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) are determined by the stop mode due to the 750th special symbol fluctuation.

Specifically, when the stop symbols of the special symbols are in a miss mode, they are grouped into miss 1 and miss 2 based on the random number value. In the case of a loss of 1, a slight time saving of 1 (for example, the probability of winning in the general drawing lottery is 51/256) is set. In the case of a loss 2, a slight time saving 2 (for example, the probability of winning by a general drawing lottery is 52/256) is set. In addition, when the stopping pattern of the special figure is in a miss mode, it is grouped into miss 1 and miss 2 based on the random number value. In the case of a loss of 1, a slight time saving of 1 (for example, the probability of winning in the general drawing lottery is 11/256) is set. In the case of a loss 2, a slight time saving 2 (for example, the probability of winning in the general drawing lottery is 12/256) is set. The number of times N is set to 20, for example.
When the stopping pattern of the special figure is in a small win mode, the groups are divided into small win 1 and small win 2 based on the random number value. If the small win is 1, the time saving is set to 100 times, and if the small win is 2, the time saving is set to 200 times. The probability of winning by drawing a regular symbol is the same as in the normal game state, but the variation time of the regular symbol is switched to a short variation pattern.
Then, in the second time-saving game state (time-saving b), when special symbol fluctuations are performed a specified number of times, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

According to the sixth modified example configured in this way, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is entered in accordance with the stop symbol of the special symbol when the number of operations is n, which causes the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) to be entered. The degree of advantage for the player in terms of time saving) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the stop symbol of the special symbol when the number of operations is n.

[7-9. Modified example 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, a seventh modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Modified example 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine relates to a pachinko game machine equipped with a time-saving function b. In the seventh modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied. Generally, in a game using a pachinko game machine, the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state) is the basic state, but in modification example 7, the latent probability variable state (high probability non time saving state) is the basic state.

For example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery is set relatively high, the probability of winning a variable jackpot in the special drawing drawing is set high (for example, 97%), and in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the first time-saving gaming state (a By lowering the rate of transition to the state (time saving), the rate of transition to the latent definite variable (definite variable non-time saving) state is increased. In the case of a normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to a low probability state (non-probability variable state) and to a first time saving game state (a time saving). When the game shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving), N time saving times are given.

In addition, when entering the first time saving gaming state (a working time saving), there is a high probability of a jackpot in which the first working time saving gaming state (a working time saving) continues after the end of the jackpot game. If a normal jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a-time saving), the game shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (a-time saving) after the jackpot game ends. When a variable probability jackpot is won in the first time saving game state (a time saving), after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to either M times of ST or a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which no time saving occurs. When moving to ST for M times, the game simultaneously moves to the first time saving game state (a time saving) for the number of time saving times M+N. In other words, if you win a probability-variable jackpot in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), after the jackpot game ends, you will move to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), and the first M times will be in a high probability state, and after ST ends. N times becomes a high probability state. In addition, the number of balls that can be obtained when transitioning from a time-saving gaming state to a jackpot gaming state is significantly greater than the number of balls that can be obtained when moving from a non-time-saving gaming state to a jackpot gaming state. It has become. In this way, according to the seventh modification, the time-saving gaming state with a low probability state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the variable-probability state where time-saving is not possible (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state). It's in specifications. Furthermore, the seventh modification of the sixth pachinko game machine is equipped with a limiter function. For example, if the number of loops between the jackpot and the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state is 15 (limiter number of times 15), the transition to the normal gaming state is made, and the number of loops between the jackpot and the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) is 5. (limiter number of times is 5), the game is shifted to the normal gaming state. Note that the limiter number of times is not limited to the above-mentioned number, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the flow of the game will be explained. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in Modified Example 7 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Immediately after the hall opens, the game is in a normal gaming state, but after the start of the game, the probability of winning a jackpot is high and most of them shift to a latent probability state, so the basic state becomes a latent probability state (high probability non-time saving state). Normally, when a jackpot is won and the game enters the first time-saving game state (a-time saving), counting of the number of operations n, which is the operating condition for the time-saving function b, is started. Here, the number of operations n is set to be equal to or larger than the number of time savings in the first time saving game state (a time saving) N times. Therefore, if the number of operations n is the number of time savers (N times) in the first time saver game state (a time saver), when the first time saver game state (a time saver) ends, b time saver will start from the next special symbol change. The function is activated and the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, and as a result, the number of time-saving games is further increased. When transitioning to ST after the end of the jackpot game, the counting of the number of operations n is not executed during the M time saving times in the high probability state, and after that, the transition to the low probability state and the N time saving times are completed. In this case, the number of operations n is counted. For this reason, when ST ends, the b time saving function is activated from the next special symbol fluctuation, and the game shifts to the second time saving game state, and as a result, the number of time saving times is further added. If the state shifts to a high-precision non-time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, no time saving will be given, so the game will normally be played with the aim of winning the jackpot.

In this way, according to the seventh modification, the time-saving gaming state with a low probability state is more advantageous to the player than the variable-probability state where time-saving is not achieved, and the first time-saving gaming state (a time saving) After the second time saving game state (b time saving) is activated, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest in which time saving is easy to continue.

In addition, in addition to winning a normal jackpot, the player enters a low probability state due to RAM clearing, ST omission, etc. In this case as well, counting of the number of operations n, which is the operating condition for the time saving function b, is started. For this reason, immediately after the hall opens, the time-saving function b is activated by extinguishing the special symbol fluctuation of the number of activations n, so it becomes possible to install a so-called wake-up function. Furthermore, when the limiter number of times is reached, the state also shifts to the low probability state.

According to the sixth pachinko gaming machine and its modification described above, a gaming machine having a new advantageous state is provided by having multiple types of limiter numbers, and providing cases where the limiter number is large and small. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine and its modification, by installing b time saving, which can be said to be a ceiling time saving, it is possible to differentiate between balls awarded after reaching the ceiling and balls awarded before reaching the ceiling. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Here, the number of time saving grants may be increased for a jackpot after reaching the ceiling (time saving b) than for a jackpot before reaching the ceiling (time saving b). Thereby, the expected value of the total number of balls that can be obtained after reaching the ceiling can be increased. In addition, in the first to seventh variations of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming machine may not be equipped with a limiter function.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and in particular, a model equipped with the b-time saving function may be provided with the following functions.
When a general look-ahead performance lottery that makes people expect a normal jackpot and a predictive performance that suggests a ceiling time reduction overlap, the predictive performance that suggests a ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) may be displayed with priority.
Alternatively, the time after the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) may be measured and displayed.
Furthermore, if the player attempts to leave the machine when the number of rotations remaining until reaching the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is close, a function may be provided to indicate to the player that the ceiling time reduction is almost reached. For example, a sensor may be provided to detect the player, and an indication may be provided when the player does not touch the firing handle for a certain period of time and transitions to the demo screen. Specifically, if the number of rotations remaining until reaching the ceiling time saver (b time saver) is close, the message ``sit'' will be displayed during the demonstration, or the message ``sit'' will be displayed during the demonstration and the setting will also be suggested. It may be equipped with the following functions.

Below, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine described above and the effects produced by the configuration will be additionally described.

[Additional note 1]
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine with an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time-saving state), certain results frequently result in small wins, thereby providing a predetermined profit to the player. Gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions have appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-076136).

By the way, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions are desired to be more entertaining.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly entertaining and advantageous gaming state function.

(1) A game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the identification information;
a passage area disposed in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member that is movable between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game media;
Displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the displacement judgment means by changing and stopping the specific identification information;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
Equipped with
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a profit to the player can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed multiple times,
The gaming state control means includes:
When the stop display mode of the identification information displayed when the judgment result of the special gaming state transition determining means determines that the transition to the second gaming state is not possible, the displacement member in the second state is Shifting a displacement pattern that takes a long time to determine to be displaced to the first state to a special time-saving state in which it is easier to select than the normal state,
After transitioning to the special time saving state, if the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a specified number of times, the special time saving state is ended;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the normal state, the variation of the identification information triggered by passage of the gaming medium to the second start area is stopped, and the first gaming state is executed.

According to (1), when the stop display mode of the identification information becomes a special mode, a transition is made to a special time saving game, and in the special time saving game (time saving b, time saving c), the displacement determination means (normal symbol lottery) is When it is determined that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state, the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) becomes the first state (open state), and the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) enters the special time-saving state. When the game medium (game ball) is captured, the identification information starts to change, and the special time saving state shifts to the normal state. If you win the transition to the first gaming state due to a change in the identification information, you will transition to the first gaming state, and if the stopping mode at this time is a special mode, after the first gaming state ends, a special time reduction will be applied. Move on to gaming. As a result, a loop of the first gaming state is formed by alternately repeating the special time saving game and the normal state, and the first gaming state can be continued. In this way, it becomes possible to realize an advantageous gaming state triggered by the special time saving state, and it becomes possible to further improve the player's interest.

(2) In (1), if the stop display mode of the identification information is a special mode, the game enters the second start area the specified number of times after transitioning to the first gaming state and ending the first gaming state. Shifting to the special time saving state in which the identification information is changed a specific number of times triggered by the passing of the ball,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special time saving state ends when the identification information starts changing the specified number of times.

(3) In (1) or (2), if gaming media passes through the first starting area or the second starting area while the identification information is changing, the change in the identification information is suspended. has a retention means to
The gaming state control means is configured to prevent fluctuations due to passing of the gaming medium to the second starting area after the first gaming state ends, which is triggered by the stop display mode of the identification information display means becoming the special mode. If the gaming machine is on hold, the special time saving state is ended at the same time as the identification information starts changing based on the hold.

(4) In (3), after the end of the first game state triggered by the stop display mode of the identification information display means becoming the special mode, the game medium is placed in the hold means in the second start mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the special time saving state is ended when a change in identification information due to passing through an area is not pending.

(5) In (1) to (4), the gaming state control means changes the gaming state after the end of the second gaming state by causing the displacement determining means to switch the displacement member to the first state with a predetermined probability. The normal state in which it is determined that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state is a time saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member in the second state is to be switched to the first state with a long displacement time. Crab migration,
A gaming machine characterized in that the benefits given to the player are different in the time saving state and the special time saving state.

(6) In (1) to (5), the displacement member is capable of capturing a plurality of game media, can maintain the first state until capturing a plurality of game media, and is capable of capturing a plurality of game media. A game machine characterized in that the game machine shifts to a second state when a medium is captured.

(7) In (1) to (6), the variation time of the identification information due to passing of the game medium to the second start area is a short-time variation, and the identification information that is changing has a high probability of displaying a stopped display mode. A gaming machine characterized by being in the special mode.

(8) In (5), a firing means for firing game media toward the game area;
Further comprising a notification means for notifying various information,
The game area has a first area and a second area in which game media can be shot separately by the player's operation of the firing means,
the first region has the first starting region;
The second region includes the passage region and the displacement member,
In the time saving state and the special time saving state, the notification means performs an effect to prompt the firing of game media into the second area, and indicates the start of a change in the identification information, which is the end of the time saving state and the special time saving state. A game machine characterized in that a suggestive effect is performed to prompt the user to fire a game medium into the first area between the time and the time when the game machine stops.

(9) In (3) or (4), a stop display mode after the change in the identification information is based on the final hold in the hold means after the change in the identification information has been processed a specified number of times in the special time saving state. , if the mode is such that the game transitions to the second gaming state and then transitions to the normal state after the end of the second gaming state, and when the mode is such that the game does not transition to the special gaming state other than the special mode, A gaming machine characterized by shifting to the normal state.

(10) The gaming machine according to any of (1) to (9), wherein the displacement member is displaced to the second state when two game media are captured in the first state.

(11) In (1) to (10), in the normal state, the first gaming state is triggered by passage of the gaming medium to the second starting area, and after the first gaming state ends, the special time saving state is set. The probability of transitioning to the first gaming state upon passage of the gaming medium to the second starting area in the special time saving state and transitioning to the special time saving state after the first gaming state ends is higher than the probability of shifting to the special time saving state. A gaming machine characterized by a high value.

(12) In (1) to (11), the game state control means causes the game to shift to the special time saving state when the identification information reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is equipped with a highly interesting and advantageous gaming state function.

[Additional note 2]
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine that has an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time-saving state), certain results frequently result in small wins, thereby providing a predetermined profit to the player. Gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions have appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-076136).

By the way, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions are desired to be more entertaining.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve such problems and to be equipped with a function of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to highly interested players.

(1) A game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the identification information;
gaming state control means for switching the gaming state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a passage area disposed in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member that is movable between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game media;
Displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the passage area;
a specific passing area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
The selection area allows the gaming medium that has passed through the specific passing area to pass through any of a plurality of areas through which gaming media can pass, including the first starting area and the passing area,
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a profit to the player can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed multiple times,
The special gaming state transition determination means is configured to determine that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area, rather than determining that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area. 1 The probability of determining that the game will move to the gaming state is high;
The second starting region allows passage of the game medium when the displacement member captures the game ball,
The displacement member has a displacement pattern in which, when the displacement determining means determines to displace the displacement member to the first state, the first state and the second state are repeated a plurality of times and then the second state is reached. 1. A gaming machine that is capable of capturing substantially the same number of game media as the plurality of times while operating in the displacement pattern.

According to (1), in the normal state, the game ball moves to a specific area (clune dish), passes through the passing area, and the displacement determining means (general figure lottery) moves the displacement member (normal electric accessory) to the first position. When it is determined that the displacement member is to be displaced to one state, the displacement member is a long one that enters the second state after repeating the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) multiple times (for example, 10 times). Works in a displacement pattern. Since the game medium passes through the second starting area when the displacement member captures the gaming medium each time it is in the first state (open state) a plurality of times (for example, 10 times), the game medium passes through the second starting area. It is possible to obtain as many first gaming states as the gaming medium has passed through. In this way, by moving the game ball to a specific area (Clune dish) and passing through the first starting area, in addition to transitioning to the special gaming state (first bonus), the game ball moves to the specific area (Clune plate) and passes through the first starting area. ) and passing through the passage area, the displacement member moves in a long displacement pattern and transitions to the first game state multiple times in succession (second bonus), which is a new game feature. can have. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a function of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to highly interested players.

(2) In (1), when the displacement member shifts to the first gaming state triggered by capturing gaming media while operating in the displacement pattern, the first gaming state is: A game machine characterized in that the game is executed while the displacement member is in the second state.

(3) In (1) or (2), the selection area includes the first starting area, the passing area, and a discharge area that leads the game medium to a path for discharging it to the outside of the game board. Game machine.

(4) In (1) to (3), it is possible to change between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture game media, and in the first state, a predetermined number of games can be played. A game machine further comprising a specific displacement member that displaces the captured game medium to the second state when the medium is captured and guides the captured game medium to the second starting area.

(5) In (1) to (4), when the special game state transition determination means determines to transition to the second game state while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the displacement member A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the second gaming state regardless of the operating state of the gaming machine.

(6) In (1) to (5), when the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area while the identification information display means is displaying the identification information in a variable manner, the Further comprising a holding means for holding a predetermined number of changing displays of the identification information,
When the special game state transition determination means determines to transition to the second game state while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the fluctuation display of the identification information held in the reservation means is , A gaming machine characterized in that the game is not executed in the second gaming state, but is executed after the second gaming state ends.

(7) In (1) to (6), while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the displacement It is preferable that the determination result of the special game state transition determination means based on the passing of the game medium to all the second start areas while the member is operating in the displacement pattern is a transition to the first game state. , a gaming machine characterized by a large profit given to the player.

(8) In (1) to (7), the gaming state control means:
The gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is a normal state in which the displacement determining means determines to switch the displacement member to the first state with a predetermined probability, and a normal state in which the displacement member in the second state is changed to the first state. Switching the displacement member to a first state with a long displacement time and a time-saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member is to be displaced;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the displacement member operates in the displacement pattern when the displacement determining means determines to displace the displacement member to the first state in the normal state.

(9) In (8), when the displacement determining means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state in the time saving state, the opening time is such that the displacement member is displaced to the first state in the normal state. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine operates in a pattern in which the number of times the first state is in the first state is one, which is longer than the time in which the first state is in the first state in the displacement pattern when it is determined that the displacement pattern is to be shifted to the first state.

(10) In (1) to (9), the benefit provided to the player by the displacement member operating in the displacement pattern, and the benefit provided to the player by the displacement member operating in the displacement pattern, and the The judgment result of the special game state transition determination means based on the passing of the game medium to the second starting area is the profit obtained by adding up the profits given to the player due to the transition to the first game state, which becomes the second game state. A game machine characterized in that the profit given by the gaming machine is larger than the profit given by the game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a gaming state function that is advantageous to highly interested players.

[Additional note 3]
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine that has an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time saving state), certain results frequently result in small wins, which makes it difficult for the player to Gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions that provide predetermined profits have appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

By the way, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions are desired to be more entertaining.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve these problems and provide a gaming machine that can provide new interest to players in advantageous gaming conditions.

(1) A game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
first identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by passage of the game medium to the first starting area by variation and stoppage of first identification information;
a second identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the special game state transition judgment means triggered by passage of the game medium to the second starting area by variation and stoppage of second identification information;
a passage area disposed in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member that is movable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and that guides the captured game medium to the second starting region;
Displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the displacement judgment means by changing and stopping the specific identification information;
A game state control means for switching the game state;
Equipped with
The stop display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information determined when the special gaming state transition determining means determines to transition to the special gaming state is such that after the special gaming state ends, the stop display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information is a probability change winning mode in which the transition determination means moves to a probability change state with a higher probability of determining that the transition to the special game state will occur; and after the end of the special game state, the special game state transition determination means determines that the transition to the special game state will occur. including a normal winning mode in which the probability of winning is shifted to an uncertain variable state with a low probability,
In the certain variable winning mode and the normal winning mode, after the end of the special game state, the displacement determining means determines to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state with a long displacement time. a stop mode in which switching to the first state shifts to a time-saving state that is easy to determine; and a displacement time in which the displacement determining means determines that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state is long. A game machine characterized by including a stop mode in which a member is switched to a first state and shifts to a non-time-saving state that is difficult to determine.

(2) In (1), a production display means for displaying various production displays;
A production control means for controlling the production display means to execute various production displays,
When the first identification information is a stop mode in which the special gaming state transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will occur, after the end of the special gaming state, the high probability in the variable probability state and the non-time saving state The probability of transitioning to either a non-time-saving state or a low-probability time-saving state in the non-probability variable state and the time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state in the variable-probability state and the non-time-saving state is in the non-probability variable state. and higher than the probability of transitioning from the time saving state to the low probability time saving state,
further comprising a counting means for storing a total value of the number of changes of the first identification information and the second identification information,
The game state control means sets a displacement pattern in which it takes a longer time to determine that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state when the value of the count means reaches a predetermined number of times than the non-time saving state. Shift to a special time saving state that makes it easier to select
The prescribed number of times shall not exceed the number of special time reductions granted when transitioning to the special time reduction state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special time saving state ends when the value of the counting means after transitioning to the special time saving state reaches a special time saving number.

(3) In (2), the effect control means displays a display indicating that the transition to the special time saving state is approaching, and displays the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time saving state. A gaming machine with special features.

(4) In (1) to (3), when the second identification information fluctuates and stops in the non-probability variable state and the non-time saving state, the stop mode is such that the second identification information fluctuates and stops in the non-probability variable state and after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of a stop mode that causes a transition to the time saving state, the number of time saving times given to the time saving state is based on the stop mode when the first identification information fluctuates and stops in the non-determinable variable state and the non-time saving state. , a gaming machine characterized in that, when the non-probability variable state is in the stop mode and the transition to the time saving state is made after the end of the special game state, the number of time saving times given to the time saving state is larger than the maximum number.

(5) In (2) to (4), after the special gaming state ends, after transitioning to the variable probability state and the time saving state, shifting to the variable probability state and the non-time saving state, and then to the non-variable probability state. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine enters the special time saving state.

(6) In (2) to (5), when the value of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, switching the table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern of the identification information for the predetermined number of times;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance control means performs control, when transitioning to the special time-saving state, to execute a specific performance that notifies the transition to the special time-saving state.

(7) In (2) to (6), the effect control means combines the reliability of the fluctuation and the transition to the special time saving state when the value of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times. As a preview, it suggests that a transition to the special gaming state is a change that can be expected, and also suggests that the fluctuation will result in a transition to the special time saving state even if the transition to the special gaming state does not occur. A game machine characterized by performing control to execute a performance.

(8) In (2) to (7), while the identification information of at least one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means is being displayed in a variable manner, the gaming medium is Further comprising a holding means for holding a predetermined number of changes in the identification information when passing through the starting area or the second starting area,
When there is a hold in which the value of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times among the holds in the hold means, the effect control means reads in advance the hold, and adjusts the hold in accordance with the hold that reaches the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to execute a countdown effect.

(9) In (2) to (8), the performance control means performs control to execute a performance that announces the number of fluctuations until transition to the special time saving state only when a specific performance is executed. A gaming machine with special features.

(10) In (2) to (9), the special game state includes a small winning game state in which a predetermined game that can provide a profit to the player can be executed, and a plurality of types in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed multiple times. a jackpot gaming state;
The value of the counting means is reset when transitioning to the jackpot gaming state,
The jackpot gaming state includes a special jackpot gaming state that performs the same operation as the small winning gaming state,
The performance control means is characterized in that, when transitioning to the small hit game state and the special jackpot game state, performs control to execute a performance that notifies whether or not the value of the counting means is reset. Game machine.

According to the present invention, when the normal state shifts to the special gaming state, after the special gaming state ends, the state shifts to the high probability non-time saving state (latent probability variable state) or the low probability time saving state. Here, in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state (latent probability variable state), it is difficult for the displacement means to shift to the first state, so the identification information is difficult to change, and moreover, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state, so that the counting means reaches the specified number of times. It's difficult. On the other hand, in the low-accuracy time-saving state, the displacement means is likely to be displaced to the first state, so the identification information is likely to fluctuate, and furthermore, it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state, so it is easier for the counting means to reach the specified number of times, and the special The possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state increases. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of changes in the identification information in a short time in an advantageous gaming state such as a low-accuracy time-saving state, and the player can move closer to the special time-saving state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide a great sense of interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide a new interest to a player in an advantageous gaming state.

[Additional note 4]
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine that has an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time saving state), certain results frequently result in small wins, which makes it difficult for the player to Gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions that provide predetermined profits have appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

However, in a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous gaming state function, the purpose is to provide players with a new sense of entertainment.

(1) A game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a starting area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Jackpot game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium to the starting area;
identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the jackpot game state transition determination means by variation and stoppage of the identification information;
Advantageous gaming state control means capable of controlling the identification information to an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to stop the identification information in a stop mode in which the identification information display means notifies an affirmative determination;
non-advantageous gaming state control means capable of controlling the identification information to a non-advantageous gaming state in which it is difficult to stop in a stop mode in which the identification information display means notifies an affirmative determination;
a counting means for storing the number of times the identification information changes;
a passage area disposed in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass;
a movable displacement member that is movable between a first state where it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium, and which guides the captured game medium to the starting area;
displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the movable displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the passage area;
a gaming state control means that switches the gaming state according to the stop display mode of the identification information;
A performance display means for performing various performance displays;
Effect control means for controlling the effect display means to execute various effect displays;
a firing means for firing game media toward the game area;
Equipped with
The advantageous state control means is
A probability-variable game that can be controlled to a probability-variable gaming state in which the probability that identification information is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode on the identification information display means is relatively high after the end of the jackpot gaming state that is transferred under the control of the gaming state control means. state control means;
After the end of the jackpot gaming state to which the gaming state control means is controlled, a non-probability variable gaming state that can be controlled to a non-probability variable gaming state in which the identification information is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode on the identification information display means is relatively low. Definitely variable game state control means,
Time-saving game state control means capable of controlling the movable displacement member to a time-saving game state including a state in which the movable displacement member is relatively likely to be in the first state after the end of the jackpot game state transferred under the control of the game state control means; , has
The unfavorable state control means is
The movable displacement member includes a state in which it is relatively difficult for the movable displacement member to enter the first state when the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner after being controlled to the time-saving gaming state by the time-saving gaming state control means reaches the number of time-saving games. It has a non-time-saving gaming state control means that can be controlled to a non-time-saving gaming state,
The starting region has a first starting region and a second starting region,
The identification information display means is configured to display first identification information that notifies a determination result of whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state triggered by passage of the gaming medium to the first starting area by variation and stoppage of the first identification information. It is characterized by comprising a display means, and a second identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the jackpot gaming state triggered by passage of the gaming medium to the second starting area by variation and stoppage of the second identification information. A gaming machine.

(2) In (1), a limiter number control means that shifts to the non-advantageous gaming state when the number of alternate shifts between the advantageous gaming state and the jackpot gaming state reaches a limiter number;
A gaming machine further comprising: a limiter number setting means for setting the limiter number of times from among a plurality of times when the non-advantageous gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

(3) The gaming machine according to (2), wherein the limiter number setting means sets the limiter number of times based on the jackpot mode.

(4) In (2) and (3), the performance control means executes a promotion performance that notifies the limiter number of times after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has transitioned from the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by performing control.

(5) In (1) to (4), specific identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the displacement judgment means by changing and stopping the specific identification information;
A special time-saving game that can be controlled to a special time-saving state in which an average time for displacing the movable displacement member in the second state to the first state is shorter than a non-time-saving state when the value of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine further comprising: state control means.

(6) In (5), the jackpot gaming state includes a special jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state is for a short time and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Includes
The effect control means controls the effect display means to vary and stop the effect identification information corresponding to the identification information, and controls the effect when the effect is shifted to the special jackpot game state and when the effect is transferred to the special time saving state. A gaming machine characterized in that a control is performed to display a common special symbol as a stop mode of the production identification information.

(7) In (1) to (6), the first area, the first starting area, the second starting area, and a movable member that causes the game ball to pass through the second starting area at regular time intervals. A gaming machine characterized by arranging.

(8) In (1) to (7), when the game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area, a small win that is advantageous to the player and is not more advantageous than the jackpot gaming state. Further comprising a small winning game state transition determination means for determining whether to transition to a winning gaming state,
The first identification information display means notifies the determination result of the small winning gaming state triggered by passage of the gaming medium to the first starting area by variation and stoppage of the first identification information,
The second identification information display means uses a second identification information display means to notify the determination result of the small winning gaming state triggered by passage of the game medium to the second starting area by variation and stoppage of the second identification information. inform,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed simultaneously, and the fluctuation time of the second identification information is longer than the fluctuation time of the first identification information.

(9) In (1) to (7), when the game medium passes through either of the first starting area and the second starting area, a small win that is advantageous to the player and is not more advantageous than the jackpot gaming state. Further comprising a small winning game state transition determination means for determining whether to transition to a winning gaming state,
arranging the first starting region in the first region;
disposing the passage area, the movable displacement member, and the second starting area in the second area;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second identification information display means displays with high probability a stop mode of the second identification information in a small win mode that notifies the transition to the small win gaming state.

(10) In (5) and (6), the special time-saving state is substantially the same as the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state,
There is a difference between the number of time savings that is given after transitioning from the special time saving state to the jackpot gaming state and the number of time saving that is given after shifting from the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by:

(11) In (5), (6), and (10), is the passage of the gaming medium into the starting area triggered by a transition to a small winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player and less advantageous than the jackpot gaming state? further comprising small winning game state transition determining means for determining whether or not;
The special time saving state is of multiple types,
The identification information display means is capable of notifying the judgment result of the small hit game state transition judgment means triggered by the passing of the gaming medium to the starting area by variation and stoppage of the identification information,
The stopping mode of the identification information at the specified number of times displayed by the identification information displaying means is a small winning mode that notifies the transition to the small winning gaming state, and the case where the stopping mode of the identification information at the specified number of times is displayed by the identification information display means is a small winning mode that notifies the transition to the small winning gaming state, and the case where the stopping mode of the identification information is a small winning mode that notifies the transition to the small winning gaming state, A game machine characterized in that the special time-saving state after reaching the specified number of times is different in the case of a failure mode in which it is notified that no transition will occur.

(12) A gaming machine in (5), (6), (10), and (11), characterized in that the counting means does not count in the variable probability gaming state.

(13) In (5), (6), (10) to (12), the identification information display means displays the stopping mode of the identification information with a high probability in a jackpot mode that notifies the transition to a jackpot gaming state. death,
After the end of the jackpot gaming state, transition to either the variable probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the non-probable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and then to the variable probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. The percentage is set high,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specified number of times is set to the number of time-savings given when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

According to the present invention, when the number of alternate shifts between the advantageous gaming state (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) and the jackpot gaming state reaches the limiter number, the non-advantageous gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state or non-profitable gaming state) When the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state) and shifts from a non-advantageous gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, the limiter number of times is set from among a plurality of times. For this reason, the limiter number of times can be set to two or more types, so for example, when the number of alternate transitions between an advantageous gaming state (probability variable gaming state) and the jackpot gaming state reaches the limiter number, a non-advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state), it becomes possible to switch the limiter number of times based on the number of changes in the identification information in the non-advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to give players new interest in a gaming machine equipped with a limiter.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide players with a new sense of interest in the gaming machine equipped with an advantageous gaming state function.

[Additional note 5]
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as advantageous gaming states, there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a jackpot, and a small winning gaming state that is controlled when a specific result is a small win and which provides less profit for the player than the jackpot gaming state. There is a gaming machine that has an advantageous gaming state including a gaming state.

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state in which the time for variable display of the above-mentioned symbols is shortened (time saving state), a specific result frequently becomes a small hit, making the game more difficult. A gaming machine equipped with an advantageous gaming state that grants a predetermined profit to a player has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

However, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming conditions are desired to be more entertaining.

Therefore, the purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine that is equipped with a gaming state function that is highly interesting and advantageous to players.

(1) A game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
first identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by passage of the game medium to the first starting area by variation and stoppage of first identification information;
a second identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the special game state transition judgment means triggered by passage of the game medium to the second starting area by variation and stoppage of second identification information;
a passage area disposed in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member that is movable between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game media;
Displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the judgment result of the displacement judgment means by changing and stopping the specific identification information;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
A performance display means for performing various performance displays;
Effect control means for controlling the effect display means to execute various effect displays;
Equipped with
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a profit to the player can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed multiple times,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance control means performs performance control related to fluctuations in the first identification information in a normal state.

(2) In (1), the first identification information and the second identification information can change at the same time,
The game state control means is configured to control a special game state in which, when the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state control means sets a special state in which the fluctuation time of the specific identification information is shorter than that in the normal state. Shift to a time-saving state,
In the first identification information and the second identification information, the fluctuation time when notifying the failure determination not to transition to the special gaming state and the first winning determination to transition to the first gaming state is the same as the fluctuation time when notifying the first winning determination to transition to the second gaming state. It shall be longer than the fluctuation time when notifying the 2-hit determination,
When one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means stops in a first hit stop mode that notifies a first hit determination, the other stops in a miss stop mode that notifies a miss determination. The game machine is characterized in that when one of the gaming machines stops in a second win stop mode that notifies a second win determination, the other stops in a miss stop mode that notifies a miss determination.

(3) In (1) or (2), the effect control means does not perform an effect regarding the fluctuation of the second identification information in a normal state, and does not output the number of changes of the second identification information to the outside. A gaming machine.

(4) A gaming machine according to any of (1) to (3), wherein the performance control means performs performance control to cause the performance display means to display the number of changes in the first identification information.

(5) The gaming machine according to (4), wherein the performance control means performs a performance that indicates the number of fluctuations until the special time saving state is reached.

(6) In (1) to (5), in the special time saving state, the first identification information and the second identification information can change simultaneously, and among the first identification information and the second identification information, A gaming machine characterized in that by stopping one variation in a first winning stop mode, the other variation is stopped in a miss stop mode.

(7) In (6), even if the special gaming state transition determination means corresponding to the other variation determines to shift to the second gaming state, the other variation is stopped in a missed stop mode. Game machine.

(8) In (1) to (7), in the special time saving state, the variable time for the second hit stop mode is made shorter than the variable time for the miss stop mode and the first hit stop mode. A gaming machine.

(9) In (8), both the first identification information and the second identification information are characterized in that the fluctuation time in which the failure stop mode and the first hit stop mode occur is shorter than the fluctuation time in which the second hit stop mode occurs. A gaming machine that does.

(10) In (1) to (9), both the first identification information and the second identification information that are changing at the same time are determined by the special gaming state transition determining means to transition to the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when notifying that a game has won, identification information that is to be stopped first in the program is stopped in a second win mode regardless of the variation time.

(11) In (1) to (10), both the first identification information and the second identification information that are changing at the same time are determined by the special gaming state transition determining means to transition to the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that when notifying that a game has won, identification information that is to be stopped first in the program is stopped in a first winning manner regardless of a variation time.

According to the present invention, when the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches a specified number of times, a transition is made to the special time saving state (ceiling time saving). Here, the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed at the same time, and since the changes in the first identification information and the second identification information are digested in parallel, reaching the specified number of times is promoted. In addition, in the normal state, an effect related to the fluctuation of the first identification information is performed. For example, by displaying the number of times the first identification information has changed, it is possible to estimate the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that realizes a performance display of a variable number of times that is highly interesting for players.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is equipped with a gaming state function that is highly interesting and advantageous for players.

7, 1007, 2007, 3007, 4007 Display device 10, 1010, 2010, 3010, 4010, Game board unit 106, 1106, 2106, 3106, 4106 Left area 107, 1107, 2107, 3107, 4107 Right area 120, 1120, 2120, 3120, 4120 First starting port 126, 1126, 2126, 3126, 4126 Passing gate 131, 1131, 2131, 3131, 4131 Big prize winning port for jackpot 140, 1140, 2140, 3140, 4140 Second starting port 146, 1146 , 2146, 3146, 4146 Ordinary electric accessories 151, 1151 Big prize opening for small winnings 185 Rotating accessories 201, 1201, 2201, 3201, 4201 Main CPU
163, 1163, 2163, 3163, 4163 First special symbol display section 164, 1164, 2164, 3164, 4164 Second special symbol display section 301, 1301, 2301, 3301, 4301 Sub CPU
3124 Croon unit 3210 Croon dish 3220 Normal figure starting port 3506 Sorting device 3511 First operating mechanism 3513 Second operating mechanism 3440 First non-electric accessory 3441 Second non-electric accessory

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a first starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a second starting area that is disposed in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start area or the second start area;
identification information display means capable of executing a first specific game that notifies the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the identification information;
gaming state control means for switching the gaming state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a predetermined passing area arranged in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
a displacement member capable of being displaced between a first state and a second state;
displacement determining means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state in response to passage of the game medium through the predetermined passage area;
a specific passage area disposed in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium fired in the first aspect can pass;
The selection area is capable of causing the gaming medium that has passed through the specific passing area to pass through any one of a plurality of areas through which gaming media can pass, including the first starting area and the predetermined passing area,
The second starting region does not pass the game medium fired in the first mode, but allows the game medium fired in a second mode different from the first mode to pass,
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state that can be controlled so that profits are more likely to be awarded to the player over a predetermined period of time, and a first gaming state that is controllable so that profits are more likely to be awarded to the player over a longer period of time than the predetermined time. a controllable second gaming state;
The special gaming state transition determination means is configured to determine that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area, rather than determining that the transition to the first gaming state is triggered by passing the gaming medium into the second starting area. 1 The probability of determining that the game will move to the gaming state is high;
The second state is a state in which it is difficult for the gaming medium to pass through the second starting region, and the first state is a state in which it is difficult for the gaming medium to pass through the second starting region than in the second state. easy condition,
The second starting region is capable of allowing game media to pass through when the displacement member is displaced to the first state,
The displacement member is operable in a predetermined displacement pattern when the displacement determining means determines to displace the displacement member to the first state,
The first specific game can be executed when a second specific game is being executed that notifies the determination result of the displacement determining means by changing and stopping the identification information,
During the period in which the operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state, and the operation of displacing from the second state to the first state may be performed multiple times. The game medium can be executed once, and when the operation is performed once, the game medium can pass through the second start area, and when the first game medium passes through the second start area, the game medium can be executed once. The first specific game can be executed a plurality of times, and when the operation is performed a plurality of times, the first specific game triggered by passage of the game medium to the second starting area can be executed at most the second starting area. It can be executed a number of times according to the number of passed gaming media ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images